JP2018042583A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance the performance effect of a game machine at the time of executing a movable body operation performance in a game body.SOLUTION: A game machine equipped with output means for outputting a specific signal to drive an electric part in response to a control signal in a serial communication system from control means executes: a flame effect performance for displaying a flame effect image over a black image as a first effect performance, when a movable body operation performance of a first time is executed; a thunder effect image for displaying a thunder effect image over the black image as a second effect performance, when a second movable body operation performance is executed; and suggests whether or not a probability variation control is performed after the end of the big win game state, by a success mode or a failure mode of a challenge performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, there is one that moves a movable body such as an accessory. In Patent Document 1, the movable body is dropped from an upper position to a lower position, and the movable body dropped to the lower position is raised to an upper position, and the lower position A gaming machine is disclosed in which a movable body that is being raised to an upper position is dropped again (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-66189 (FIG. 30 etc.)

  However, in the conventional gaming machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that there is no change in the production mode between when the movable body is dropped to the lower position and when the movable body is dropped again, and the interest is insufficient.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the effects when the movable body operates.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A movable body (movable member 321) capable of a first operation (a standing operation that is a movement from a tilting position to a standing position) and a second operation (a tilting operation that is a movement from a standing position to a tilting position);
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects (process during effect symbol variation (S75), big hit game process (S78), etc.);
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means for outputting specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication system from the control means. For example, a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state),
The effect execution means is a first pattern for executing a special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (a flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and a second movable body motion effect is Production pattern A1 which is not executed and flame effect production is executed at the time of the first movable body motion production and flame effect production is executed at the time of the second movable body motion production. With this, after executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern (first time) that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. The effect can be executed by the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable body motion effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable object motion effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production when the movable body operates by diversifying the production by changing the aspect of the special production accompanying the first operation of the movable body. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A movable body (movable member 321) capable of a first operation (a standing operation that is a movement from a tilting position to a standing position) and a second operation (a tilting operation that is a movement from a standing position to a tilting position);
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects (process during effect symbol variation (S75), big hit game process (S78), etc.);
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Set to the normal slew rate output state),
The effect execution means is a first pattern for executing a special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (a flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and a second movable body motion effect is Production pattern A1 which is not executed and flame effect production is executed at the time of the first movable body motion production and flame effect production is executed at the time of the second movable body motion production. With this, after executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern (first time) that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. The effect can be executed by the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable body motion effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable object motion effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production when the movable body operates by diversifying the production by changing the aspect of the special production accompanying the first operation of the movable body. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine of means 1 or means 2,
The special effect is executed at a timing prior to the specific effect (a challenge effect that is executed during execution of the fifth round and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a promiscuous state after the jackpot gaming state ends). Effect (effect that displays on the effect display device 5 an image in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001),
Depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, the ratio of the predetermined notification in the specific effect varies (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect pattern (The probability variation jackpot is reported at a higher rate than when A1 and A2 are selected)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the player will be interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 1 to 3,
The effect execution means is a third pattern for executing the special effect of the second mode in accordance with the first operation of the movable body (a lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body operation effect and the second movable body operation effect is performed. Is not executed in the production pattern B1, the lightning effect production is performed during the first movable body motion production and the lightning effect production is performed during the second movable body production production.
In the case where the effect is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern.

  According to such a configuration, the player expects the special effect of the second mode to be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but the special mode of the first mode is temporarily associated with the first motion. Even if the effect is executed, the interest in the special effect can be maintained because there is an expectation that the second effect of the second aspect will be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 1 to 4,
It further includes operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player,
The aspect of the special effect is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation means (change from an image displaying the flame effect image 1010 superimposed on the black image 1001 to an image displaying the lightning effect image 1020 superimposed on the black image 1001). A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

  According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect due to the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A movable body (movable member 321) capable of a first operation (a standing operation that is a movement from a tilting position to a standing position) and a second operation (a tilting operation that is a movement from a standing position to a tilting position);
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects (process during effect symbol variation (S75), big hit game process (S78), etc.);
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means for outputting specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication system from the control means. For example, a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state),
The effect execution means is a first pattern for executing a special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (a flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and a second movable body motion effect is Production pattern A1 which is not executed and flame effect production is executed at the time of the first movable body motion production and flame effect production is executed at the time of the second movable body motion production. With this, after executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern (first time) that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. The effect can be executed with the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable object motion effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable object action effect,
In the case where the effect is executed in the second pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production when the movable body operates by diversifying the production by changing the aspect of the special production accompanying the first operation of the movable body. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
A movable body (movable member 321) capable of a first operation (a standing operation that is a movement from a tilting position to a standing position) and a second operation (a tilting operation that is a movement from a standing position to a tilting position);
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects (process during effect symbol variation (S75), big hit game process (S78), etc.);
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Set to the normal slew rate output state),
The effect execution means is a first pattern for executing a special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (a flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and a second movable body motion effect is Production pattern A1 which is not executed and flame effect production is executed at the time of the first movable body motion production and flame effect production is executed at the time of the second movable body motion production. With this, after executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern (first time) that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. The effect can be executed with the effect pattern A3) in which the flame effect effect is executed at the time of the movable object motion effect and the lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the second movable object action effect,
In the case where the effect is executed in the second pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production when the movable body operates by diversifying the production by changing the aspect of the special production accompanying the first operation of the movable body. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
A gaming machine of means 6 or means 7,
The special effect is executed at a timing prior to the specific effect (a challenge effect that is executed during execution of the fifth round and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a promiscuous state after the jackpot gaming state ends). Effect (effect that displays on the effect display device 5 an image in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001),
Depending on which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, the ratio of the predetermined notification in the specific effect varies (when the effect pattern A3 is selected, the effect pattern (The probability variation jackpot is reported at a higher rate than when A1 and A2 are selected)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the player will be interested in which of the first pattern and the second pattern the effect is executed, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 6-8,
The effect execution means is a third pattern for executing the special effect of the second mode in accordance with the first operation of the movable body (a lightning effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body operation effect and the second movable body operation effect is performed. Is not executed in the production pattern B1, the lightning effect production is performed during the first movable body motion production and the lightning effect production is performed during the second movable body production production.
In the case where the effect is executed in the third pattern, the ratio of the predetermined state (probability change state) is higher than in the case where the effect is executed in the first pattern.

  According to such a configuration, the player expects the special effect of the second mode to be executed in accordance with the first motion of the movable body, but the special mode of the first mode is temporarily associated with the first motion. Even if the effect is executed, the interest in the special effect can be maintained because there is an expectation that the second effect of the second aspect will be executed in accordance with the subsequent first operation.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 6-9,
It further includes operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by the player,
The aspect of the special effect is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation means (change from an image displaying the flame effect image 1010 superimposed on the black image 1001 to an image displaying the lightning effect image 1020 superimposed on the black image 1001). It is possible to do this.

  According to such a configuration, the player can expect a change in the aspect of the special effect due to the operation, and can enhance the interest of the special effect.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to (1) to (5) shown below. The invention according to the above means 1 to 10 may further have the configurations of (1) to (5).

(1) There is a gaming machine,
Display means (effect display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying multiple types of effects (reach effects, etc.);
A movable body (such as a movable member 321);
Movable body effecting means capable of executing the movable body effect to operate the movable body (effect control CPU 120, movable body effect processing in the effect symbol variation process of S75 in the effect control process processing of FIG. 17, etc.),
When the movable body effect is executed, a different type of effect display (battle reach) is selected depending on which effect display is performed among a plurality of types of effect display (battle reach effect, story reach effect, etc.). The particle effect image 71 corresponding to the effect, the flame effect image 73 corresponding to the story reach effect, etc.) can be displayed on the display means (FIGS. 23, 24, etc.) (in step S75 in the effect control process of FIG. 17). Production effect display processing in the production symbol variation processing).

  According to such a configuration, when the movable body effect is executed, it is possible to display an effect effect display in a different mode depending on which effect display is performed among a plurality of types of effect display. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect in which the operation of the movable body and the production effect display of the display means are linked.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
Among the effect displays in which the movable body effect is executed, when a specific type of effect display (battle reach effect or the like) is executed, the effect effect display in a specific mode (particles in FIGS. 23D and 23E) An effect of superimposing the effect image 71 etc. on the specific type of effect display (display of the victory effect image) can be executed (FIGS. 23A to 23G, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a specific type of effect display in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display of the display means, and the operation of the movable body by the specific type of effect display and the display means It is possible to further enhance the production effect in cooperation with the production effect display.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
Among the effect displays in which the movable body effect is executed, when a predetermined type of effect display (story reach effect or the like) is executed, the effect effect display in a predetermined form (FIGS. 24D and 24E) An effect of superimposing and displaying the effect image 73 and the like on a predetermined image (black image 72 and the like in FIGS. 24D and 24E) displayed in the entire display area of the display means can be executed (FIG. 24A and FIG. 24B). A) to (G) etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect in which the movable body effect is executed and an effect display on the display unit, and in addition to emphasize the movable body effect, the game Can improve the interest of

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3),
The movable body (movable member 321 and the like) is movable to a standby position (first position and the like shown in FIGS. 8 and 9) and an advance position (second position and the like shown in FIGS. 8 and 9).
When the gaming machine is activated, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body (initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S51B in FIG. 16) and a break-in operation for moving the movable body (FIG. 16 (step S51A, the operation in the movable member break-in process in FIG. 18) and the like (step S120A for effect control).

  According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body and a running-in operation for moving the movable body are executed. For this reason, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable body from operating well.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4),
About the variable display that has not yet been started, the storage unit for storing as the storage for holding (the microcomputer 100 for game control, the RAM 102, the first and second holding storage buffers),
Hold display means (effect display device 5, hold display area H) capable of displaying the hold storage stored in the hold storage means as a hold display (hold image H or the like);
Fluctuation corresponding display means (effect display device 5, active display area AHA) capable of performing fluctuation corresponding display (active image AH or the like) corresponding to the variable display when the variable display based on the hold storage is performed. ,
The hold display mode change (change during hold display in FIG. 28) that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold memory is executed, and the change correspondence display mode is changed during the execution of the change display. A change corresponding display mode change (change during active display in FIG. 28) to be performed is selected from among a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage. Display mode changing means that can be executed at any of the timing (microcomputer 100 for effect control, display mode change processing of [change display effect such as hold display]),
The display mode changing means includes a first specific display mode (character icon display in FIG. 27A) and a second specific display mode (FIG. 27B) in which the display type of the change target is different from the normal display mode. The selection ratio of the timing at which the display mode change is executed differs depending on whether it is an animal character icon display (as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B). The change effect execution rate is high, the animal character icon display has a high change effect execution rate during active display, and the rate at which the display mode actually changes when the change effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. Is the same during the hold display and during the active display, so depending on whether the character icon display or the animal character icon display, , Different frequency of changes display form icons, the proportion select whether to change the display form in either an in active display and pending displays different.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change for the hold display mode change and the change display mode change. The interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, the invention concerning the following means 11 to the invention concerning the means 11 to the means 18 is included. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is awarded to the player. There is something configured to give to. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine). In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine). The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as “round”.

  Some such gaming machines are configured such that the signal waveform rises gently in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate. For example, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117505 (particularly, paragraphs 0071 and 0096, FIG. 6), a signal processing unit (output unit) has a waveform in which a signal rises more slowly than a rectangular waveform. A gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of radio interference by deforming and outputting a rectangular wave is known.

  According to such a gaming machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by causing the waveform of the signal output from the output means to rise gently. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board where the output means is provided is insufficient, and the control signal has sufficient noise resistance to prevent malfunction. There is a possibility that it cannot be increased. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction.

In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine of the means 11 is:
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state is set)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 12 of still another aspect is:
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Set to the normal slew rate output state)
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

The gaming machine of means 13 is
A gaming machine of means 11 or means 12,
The output means outputs a specific signal (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23) from a specific signal output unit (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by a parallel communication method. , Output signals from Q0 to Q11) (for example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 49, each group is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels). In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 3 groups of 4 channels.), The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, As shown in FIG. 49, output signals from driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 are output. Timing may be configured to be distributed are) as each group.

  According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

The gaming machine of means 14 is
A gaming machine of means 13,
Driving means (for example, operation motors 9060A to 9060C) that include movable members (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that operate, and that operate the movable members are output from specific signal output units of the same group of output means. (For example, as shown in FIG. 51, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Good.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

The gaming machine of means 15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 11 to 14,
The output means has a stop function (for example, a time-out function) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the control signal was input (for example, the T terminal is set to H (high)). By setting, the time-out function is set to the valid state (see FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
A gaming machine of means 15,
Control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeats at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the production control process (see step S9065)). By outputting the control signal, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, or the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The control may be performed such that the drive control is continuously executed).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
A gaming machine of means 15 or means 16,
The output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to an invalid state, and the T terminal is set to H (high)). Thus, the time-out function is set to the valid state (see FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce costs by sharing parts.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 11 to 17,
The control means includes a movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that is provided on a first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012) and performs an operation, and the control means includes the first substrate and the first substrate. When a second substrate different from the substrate is connected, an abnormality notification of the movable member is issued based on a signal from detection means (for example, a movable member position sensor 9061) that can detect the state of the movable member. (For example, refer to steps S9058 to S9060 of the production control main process), and when the first board and the second board (eg, production control relay board 9016A) are in an unconnected state, It may be configured to perform control so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member (see, for example, step S9057 of the effect control main process).

  According to such a configuration, the work efficiency in the manufacturing stage and the development stage can be improved.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). (A) is a front view showing an effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from an oblique front. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from obliquely behind. (A) is a front view which shows the state which has a movable part in a tilting position, and (B) shows the state which has a movable part in a standing position. (A) is a pinion gear, (B) is a rear view showing a rack gear. (A) is the schematic which shows the state which has a movable member in the 1st position, and (B) shows the state which exists in the 2nd position. (A) is the side view of the schematic which shows the state which has a movable member in the 1st position, and (B) shows the state in the 2nd position. (A) is a schematic view showing a state where the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, (B) is a state where the rack gear is moved, and (C) is a schematic view showing a state where the rack gear is regulated. (A)-(D) are the principal part enlarged views which show the state of the gear until it will be in a control state. (A) is a restricted state, (B) is a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and (C) is a schematic view showing an initial driving state. (A) is a restricted state, (B) is a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and (C) is a schematic diagram showing an initial driving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member break-in process. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 1 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 2 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A)-(D) is explanatory drawing which shows the condition which changes to a control state by the control means as the modification 3 of a movable part drive mechanism. (A) is a control part as the modification 4 of a movable part drive mechanism, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the control part as the modification 5 of a movable part drive mechanism. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device when a battle reach effect is performed. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device when a story reach effect is performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production and movable body production in a specific super reach production. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of the effect production in a specific super reach production, and movable body united operation production. It is a figure which shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. An icon that executes display mode change effect execution timing selection processing, display mode change effect type selection processing, and change mode selection processing when the hold display is determined to be an icon-shaped display mode such as a character icon or character icon It is various data tables used for production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern of a movable body operation | movement effect and an effect production. It is a display screen figure which shows the example of a display of an effect display apparatus when a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a timing chart which shows the example of control of a movable body operation effect and an effect production. It is a display screen figure which shows the other example of a display of an effect display apparatus when a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a timing chart which shows the other example of control of a movable body operation effect and an effect production. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the case where a several movable member will be in the advance state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of an effect movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various circuits etc. which were mounted in the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the memory content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the several light-emitting body which comprises a light-emitting body. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting divided | segmented into a some block. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection setting of a serial output system and a light-emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a light-emitting body driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, and right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for describing each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit illustrated in FIG. 45. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and input / output content. It is a figure which shows the execution example of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of memory inspection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of calculation content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a lighting data generation table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of audio | voice data, and the operation example which reproduces | regenerates a music. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in an upper side mechanism. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in a lower side mechanism.

[Configuration of pachinko machines]
An embodiment for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side are shown. This will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a facing surface that faces a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as gaming machines) 1 are roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. 3. A game area 10 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by the guide rails 2b is formed in the game board 2. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a ball striking device (not shown) and driven. Further, the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the gaming area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. It is mainly composed of a board surface plate (not shown) provided with a guide rail 2b and the like, and a spacer member (not shown) attached integrally to the back side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front with a non-light-transmitting member such as a plywood board. May be configured.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right position of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, a 7 segment LED or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2, an effect display device 5 as a display means is provided. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 4B in the special game are respectively displayed. In the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example, the effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. When the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special game, the effect is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the symbol variation display result is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to stop display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and end the variable display. .

  For example, eight kinds of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of effect symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as a suitable number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. In each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, a hold that displays the hold memory number (the number of the special figure hold memory) as the number of the variable storage hold memory information corresponding to the special figure game is specified. Memory display is performed.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  In the first special symbol display 4A, it is possible to specify the number of reserved memory information (first reserved memory information) generated based on the first start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening. The first special figure reserved memory number is displayed by lighting of the LED (the number of lights). The second hold indicator 25B is capable of specifying the number of pieces of hold storage information (second hold storage information) generated based on the second start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. 2 The special figure reserved memory number is displayed by turning on the LED (the number of lights).

  A first hold display area 5D and a second hold display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right in the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold display area 5D, the first special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of the first hold memory information generated based on the first start winning is displayed by the number of sphere (circular) hold images H. Is done. In the second hold display area 5U, the second special figure hold memory number that can specify the number of second hold memory information generated based on the second start winning is displayed based on the number of sphere (circular) hold images H. Is done.

  In the first hold display area 5D, the hold image H is displayed in such a manner that the hold image increases on the left side every time the first hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the first hold storage information is executed. Every time, the hold image H at the right end corresponding to the first hold storage information is erased, and display is performed in which the remaining hold images H are shifted rightward one by one. In the second hold display area 5U, the hold image is displayed in such a manner that the hold image H increases on the right side whenever the second hold storage information is generated, and the variable display based on the second hold storage information is executed. Each time, the hold image H at the left end corresponding to the second hold storage information is erased, and display is performed in which the remaining hold images are shifted leftward one by one.

  The variation corresponding display corresponding to the variation display is shown during the execution of the variation display corresponding to the suspended display that has been erased (moved or shifted) from each of the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U. An active display area AHA for displaying an image (hereinafter referred to as an active image or an active display) AH is formed in the central portion of the hold display area. In the active display area AHA, the hold image H displayed in the first hold display area 5D or the second hold display area 5U has been displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image AH is displayed in such a manner that it can be identified that it corresponds to the reserved image. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 5.

  In the hold display area, the hold storage information may be displayed in a combined display mode without distinguishing the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U. Such a summed pending storage display makes it easy to grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  With respect to the hold image H displayed in each of the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U, the hold display mode in which the hold display mode is changed before the variable display of the target hold storage information is executed. A change effect may be executed. In the hold display mode change effect, the display mode such as the color or shape of the hold image H is changed.

  For example, the color of the reserved image H can be changed to blue, green, and red. When it is determined that the hold display mode change effect is executed at a predetermined ratio, and the variable display result based on the hold storage information to be the effect is a jackpot display result, the change after the change is performed at a ratio of blue <green <red. On the other hand, when the color of the reserved image H is selected and determined, and when the variation display result is an outlier display result, the color of the changed reserved image H is selected and determined at a ratio of red <green <blue. Thereby, the expectation degree to the big hit based on the color of the hold image H after the change when the hold display mode change effect is executed is set to have a ratio of blue <green <red. Therefore, when the hold display mode change effect is executed, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for jackpot based on the color of the hold image after the change.

  Also, for the active image AH, similarly to the reserved image H, the display mode change effect is executed, and the display mode such as the color or shape of the reserved image H is changed. The display mode change effect of such active display is also determined in a mode in which the degree of expectation for jackpot can be specified at the same selection ratio as the hold display mode change effect, and the display mode such as the color or shape after the change is determined. The Note that the display mode change effect need not be executed for the active display.

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a second starting prize opening is formed as a starting region (second starting region).

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided above the second holding display 25B. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed. Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area 10, there is provided an out-port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and an effect LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area 10. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area 10 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. . At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 10 is provided. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping driving of a shooting motor provided in a hitting ball shooting device (not shown).

  A gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10 to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate (hit ball supply tray) that is held (stored) is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes.

  A controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower plate body or the like below the stick controller 31 </ b> A. For example, the controller sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including a shape photosensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect the pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B that detects a pressing operation performed by the player on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is installed.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes the normal symbol variation display such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area 10 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. The normal symbol indicator is displayed on the basis of the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, for example, that the previous general symbol game has been completed The usual game by 20 is started.

  In this ordinary game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time which is a normal symbol change time elapses, a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol change display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “usually lost”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state, the special game by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B, after the special symbol variation display is started, when the variation display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol variation display is performed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. Note that a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of the predetermined display is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to control to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, a round that is advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times in a big hit gaming state (advantageous state). Be controlled.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a special symbol indicating the number “2” may be used as the small hit symbol. Each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” as the special symbols for the special figure game is stopped and displayed as the “big hit” as the specific display result, it is specially variable in the jackpot game state. In a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls is generated in the big winning door of the winning ball apparatus 7 , Open the grand prize opening. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16”, etc.). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  In the case where the small hit symbol (for example, the number “2”) is stopped and displayed, if the small hit symbol is derived as a confirmed special symbol, it is controlled to the small hit symbol game state as the special game state. Good. Specifically, in the small hit game state, for example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is advantageous to the player in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 as in the above-described short-term open big hit state in which a practically no outgoing ball (prize ball) is obtained. What is necessary is just to perform the variable winning operation | movement changed to a 1st state (open state).

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, the variation display of the effect symbols is started. The period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols to the end of the variation display due to the stop display of the confirmed effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state refers to an effect design (“reach variation design”) that has not been stopped yet when the effect design that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, etc.) in advance. The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not been stopped yet when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the presentation symbols are changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the variation pattern of the effect pattern are referred to as “reach effect display” (or simply “reach effect”). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitting body such as the effect LED 9, etc. before reaching the reach state. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability”, “hit reliability”, “expectation”, or “hit expectation”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. In addition, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variation display result is “losing”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the variation display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state when the jackpot symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that is a jackpot symbol as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable variable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the non-probable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without the reach effect being executed.

  The confirmed effect symbol which is a normal big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is variably displayed in, for example, the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols having the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols having the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “middle” and “right”. The effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the finalized symbol of the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variable jackpot combination) is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. It should be noted that the normal jackpot combination (non-probable variation jackpot combination) may be stopped and displayed as the confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric chew support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is increased as described later. Here, the normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, after the power is turned on) The same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  In the special symbol game, among the special symbols that become jackpot symbols, if the probability variation jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the numbers “5” and “7” is stopped and displayed, the change display state of the effect symbol In response to the reach state being reached, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination and The determined effect design may be stopped and displayed. Note that the probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol without executing the reach effect. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number “1” that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. Among the effect symbols of “8”, the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are “5” or “7” are displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Any device that can be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line may be used. The effect symbols having the symbol numbers “5” and “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variation display mode in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game will have a "big hit" variation display result. This is referred to as a variation display mode of “probability variation” (also referred to as “big hit type”). In this mode, the “open hit” state is controlled based on the fact that among the “big change” jackpot types, “5” and “7” change display results are “big hit” as the confirmed special symbols. After the end, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the fluctuation display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again after the big hit gaming state is ended. As with the time reduction control, the probability variation control is ended when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times the same as the time reduction number or 90 times different from the time reduction number) are executed after the big hit gaming state is finished. May be. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time-shortening control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electricity support control) that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a “short time state” or a “high base state”. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a “probability variation state” or a “high probability state”. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a “high probability high base state”. In this embodiment, the game state to be controlled is not set, but the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a “high probability low base state”. . In addition, only the gaming state in which time-shortened control or high-open control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”. is there. On the other hand, the probability variation state (high accuracy low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is also referred to as “time variation without probability reduction” to distinguish it from the high accuracy high base state. is there. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a “low probability high base state”. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a “low probability low base state”. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-figure game can be executed frequently and the fluctuation display result in each special-figure game will be “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a “special gaming state”.

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state is not changed after the control to the small hit game state described above, and the game state before the change display result is “small hit” is displayed. Control may be continued.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces the effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the production LED 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is used for effects such as display operations in the effect display device 5, all or part of the sound output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the on / off operations in the effect LED 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and the lighting LED 9 is turned on / off based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit that performs the above is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a general figure hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, the variation time of the effect symbol, the type of reach effect, and the pseudo-ream (originally one variation corresponding to one reserved memory, multiple times corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories) It is an effect display that makes it appear as if the fluctuations are continuously performed. One start is made to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one start winning prize. Fluctuations that indicate fluctuation modes, such as presence / absence of temporary stop and re-variation for a predetermined number of times for all symbol sequences (left, middle, right) within the fluctuation time determined for winning. A variation pattern designation command indicating a pattern, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 5, and a voice control used for controlling a voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Command, contains a lamp control commands used to control and presentation for LED9 and decorative LED lighting operation.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number which updates the numerical data which shows the random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production | presentation display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for production control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The electrical components related to the execution of the effect control such as the effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 on the effect control board 12 are also referred to as an effect control microcomputer.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect display device 5 is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2 c formed in the game board 2. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2 c in the game board 2. In addition, an effect unit 300 is provided between the back of the game board 2 and the effect display device 5, and the effect control board 12 has various motors (first effect motor 303, A plurality of electronic components such as a second performance motor 330), a solenoid, a sensor, and a light emitting diode (LED) are connected. In FIG. 2, illustrations of these electronic components other than the first effect motor 303 and the second effect motor 330 are omitted.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 12, as with the main board 11, for example, random values (also referred to as “effect random numbers”) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect are set. .

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, the ROM 121 uses the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect LED 9 and the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be stored is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern during special figure change, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. The notice effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  In addition, as the notice effect that is executed during the change display of the effect symbol, for example, as will be described later, a movable notice that the movable member 321 as a movable body (movable object) rises, or the player can use the stick controller 31A or push button. Big hits such as an operation notice executed on condition that 31B is operated, a step-up notice that a predetermined image is switched stepwise, a line notice that a character appears and hits a line, a cut-in notice that a predetermined image is interrupted and displayed Jackpot announcement effect that suggests the possibility of reach, reach notice that suggests whether to become reach, pseudo-continuous notice that informs whether or not to become a quasi-ream, stop-symbol notice that announces a stop symbol, game state probability At the start of variable display or when reach is reached, such as a latent announcement that warns whether or not it is in a fluctuating state (whether it is hidden) Stomach comprising a plurality of notice to be executed.

[Operation of pachinko machines]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are set via the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A or 2 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the special symbol display 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process, thereby determining the normal symbol variation display mode using the random number MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result, and performing the display operation (for example, turning on the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20. ), Etc., to control the normal symbol variation display, the tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S15 shown in FIG. 14 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S21). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in S22 to S29 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

  In the start winning determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a first start winning or a second starting winning by the first start opening switch 22A or the second start opening switch 22B. If the random number MR1 for determining the result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted and the first start winning prize is obtained, the free entry in the first special figure holding storage unit is extracted. In the case of the second start winning prize, it is stored at the top of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit.

  The special symbol normal process of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol indicator are displayed based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit and the second special symbol storage unit. It is determined whether or not to start the special game with 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the jackpot symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B). One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from any of a plurality of variations using numerical data indicating a variation pattern determination random value MR3 based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. This includes the process of determining whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the variation pattern setting processing of S23, the variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the special symbol display result determination random number MR1, the jackpot type determination random value MR2, and the variation pattern determination random value MR3. The process which determines the fluctuation | variation display mode of is included.

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 4A or the second special symbol display unit 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is on. When the big hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the like, for example, a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release process of S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect LED 9 or the like. And a process for performing various settings (setting of a probability change flag and a time reduction flag) for starting the probability change control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  In the big hit ending process, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is read to identify whether the big hit type is “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit”. . If it is determined that the identified big hit type is not “non-probable variation big hit”, setting for starting the probability variation control (setting of the probability variation flag) is performed. In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (in advance corresponding to the setting of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special game that can be executed during the time reduction control). A predetermined count initial value (in this embodiment, “100”) is set in the time-count counter.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable member break-in process for performing a break-in operation for moving the movable member 321 (S51A). The movable member break-in process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms the operation of a plurality of types of movement patterns of the movable member 321 in the effect such as the notice effect, or the initial position of the movable member 321 (first position in this embodiment) by the position detection sensor 333. Is detected, or a movable member initialization process for moving the movable member 321 to the initial position is executed (S51B).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating the counter value for generating effect random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process for determining the display pattern of the hold storage display together with the presence or absence of the hold display notice effect (S71). A hold display update process is executed to update the hold storage display in the first hold display area 5D and the second hold display area 5U to a display corresponding to the stored content of the start winning reception command buffer (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S74).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S74): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

  Production symbol variation processing (S75): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (S76): Based on the reception of the production control command (design determination command) for instructing all symbols to be stopped, control is performed to stop the variation of the production symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S77) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S73).

  Jackpot display process (S77): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a jackpot. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S78).

  Big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S79).

  Big hit end effect process (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S73).

[Structure of production unit]
Next, the rendering unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3A is a front view showing the effect unit, and FIG. 3B is a rear view. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed obliquely from behind. 6A is a front view showing a state in which the movable part is in the tilted position, and FIG. 6B is a front view showing a state in which the movable part is in the standing position. 7A is a rear view showing the pinion gear, and FIG. 7B is a rear view showing the rack gear. 8A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state where the movable member is in the first position, and FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram illustrating a state where the movable member is in the second position. 10A is a schematic view showing a state where the pinion gear is engaged with the rack gear, FIG. 10B is a state where the rack gear is moved, and FIG. 10C is a schematic view showing a state where the rack gear is regulated. FIGS. 11A to 11D are enlarged views of main parts showing the state of the gears until (A) to (D) are in the restricted state. 12A is a schematic diagram showing a restricted state, FIG. 12B is a schematic view showing a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the first operating direction, and FIG. 12C is an initial driving state. FIGS. 13A and 13B are schematic views showing a restricted state, FIG. 13B a state in which the pinion gear is changed to a restricted release state by rotating the pinion gear in the second operation direction, and FIG. 13C is a driving initial state.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6, the effect unit 300 is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and is a base portion 301 fixed at a predetermined location. A movable portion 302 that can be rotated with respect to the base portion 301, a tilting position where the movable portion 302 is tilted sideways (see FIG. 6A), and an upright position (see FIG. 6 (FIG. 6A)). B)), and a first effect motor 303 that rotates between them.

  A bearing hole 310 is formed through the base portion 301, and a guide groove 311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 310 is formed around the bearing hole 310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 310 on the back surface of the base portion 301, a first effect motor 303 that rotates the movable portion 302 is fixed on the back surface, and the drive projecting forward through the base portion 301. A turntable 312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown).

  A shaft member 313 that faces in the front-rear direction protrudes from a predetermined peripheral edge of the turntable 312, and the lower end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 313. Further, a detection piece 315 is provided on the opposite side of the periphery of the turntable 312 to the shaft member 313, and the detection piece 315 is detected by a position detection sensor 316 provided below the turntable 312. The production control CPU 120 can specify that the movable portion 302 is located at the tilt position.

  The movable portion 302 includes a rotating member 320, a movable member 321 provided on the front side of the rotating member 320 so as to be slidable with respect to the rotating member 320, and a movable member on the back side of the rotating member 320. 321 and a rack gear 322 that moves integrally. The movable member 321 can be reciprocated between a first position on the rotating shaft 325 side with respect to the rotating member 320 and a second position farther from the rotating shaft 325 than the first position.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable effect of moving the movable member 321 between the first position and the second position when the movable part 302 is in the standing position. . The movable member 321 is at least partially retracted below the display screen of the effect display device 5 when in the first position, and at least partially overlaps the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5 at the second position. (See FIG. 1).

  The rotating member 320 is formed of a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and is provided on the right side of the front surface so as to project from the rotating shaft 325 and the left side of the rotating shaft 325 by being inserted into the bearing hole 310 from the rear side. The first guide shaft 326 inserted into the guide groove 311 from the rear side, and the second guide shaft 327 protruding from the upper right side of the rotation shaft 325 and inserted from the rear side into the guide groove 311 are protruded. Yes.

  The upper end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported at the tip of the second guide shaft 327 that is inserted through the guide groove 311 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 301. That is, the turntable 312 and the rotation member 320 are connected via the link member 314. A coil spring 328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 325 to urge the rotation member 320 toward the standing position at all times.

  On the left side of the first guide shaft 326, a linear slide groove 329 that guides the movable member 321 in the left-right direction extends in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321 is fixed above the slide groove 329 on the front surface of the rotating member 320, and the drive shaft protrudes rearward through the base portion 301. A pinion gear 331 for operating the rack gear 322 is fixed to the tip of 330a. In this embodiment, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 330.

  A hook 332 that is engaged with the left end of the tension spring 323 for biasing the rack gear 322 is provided on the rear surface on the left side of the rotating member 320 so as to protrude rearward. In addition, a position detection sensor 333 that detects a detection piece 334 formed at the right end of the rack gear 322 is provided on the right rear surface, and the detection piece 334 is detected by the position detection sensor 333, thereby performing the effect control. The CPU 120 can specify that the movable member 321 is located at the first position.

  The movable member 321 has a disk-shaped light emitting part 321A and an attachment part 321B extending to the right side from the light emitting part 321A. The light emitting unit 321A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) (not shown) inside, and can emit light forward. Further, two bosses 334a and 334b project from the rear surface of the mounting portion 321B. The bosses 334a and 334b are inserted into the slide groove 329 and are rack geared by screws N1 screwed from the rear surface side of the rack gear 322. By fixing 322, the movable member 321 disposed on the front side of the rotating member 320 and the rack gear 322 disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 320 are integrated.

  The integrated movable member 321 and rack gear 322 are guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 320 by inserting two bosses 334 a and 334 b into the slide groove 329. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 322, a hook 335 is protruded rearward so that the right end of the tension spring 323 is locked to the hook 332 of the rotating member 320. That is, one end of the tension spring 323 is locked to the hook 332 of the rotating member 320 and the other end is locked to the hook 335 of the rack gear 322, so that the movable member 321 is always directed toward the second position. Energize.

  In the effect unit 300 configured as described above, the movable portion 302 is located at the tilted position as shown in FIG. 6A in the initial driving state. Then, when the turntable 312 is rotated clockwise by the first effect motor 303 by the front view, the second guide shaft 327 is pulled downward by the link member 314, so that the front view about the rotation shaft 325 is obtained. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the standing position shown in FIG. In addition, since the urging force of the coil spring 328 acts when rotating from the tilt position to the standing position, the load on the first effect motor 303 is reduced. Further, the first effect motor 303 is reversely driven to rotate from the standing position to the tilt position.

  Next, the detailed structure of the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7A, the pinion gear 331 is a rotating gear in which a plurality of drive teeth protrude from a part of the peripheral surface of the disk member. The drive teeth have a plurality of drive teeth 340A projecting in the rotational direction and a tooth thickness dimension L2 in a pitch circle having a radius from the drive shaft 330a to the position where the teeth mesh with each other than the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive teeth 340A. The driving teeth 340B have a large driving tooth 340B, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 in the pitch circle is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the driving teeth 340A and 340B (tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). ).

  In addition, since the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3 of the drive teeth 340A, 340B, and 340C are different from each other in this way, the tip surface 342A of the drive tooth 340A, the tip surface 342B of the drive tooth 340B, and the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C. The length in the circumferential direction in each is the same as the relationship between the tooth thickness dimensions L1, L2, and L3. That is, the circumferential length of the tip surface 342B is longer than the circumferential length of the tip surface 342A, and the circumferential length of the tip surface 342C is the circumferential direction of the tip surfaces 342A and 342B. It is longer than the length dimension of.

  In this embodiment, the front end surfaces 342A and 342B are flat surfaces, and a front end surface 342C constituting a restricting portion described later is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a.

  The tooth gap dimension L4 between each drive tooth 340A and drive tooth 340A and the tooth gap dimension L5 between drive tooth 340A and drive tooth 340B are the same (tooth gap dimension L4 = L5), and drive tooth 340A. The tooth gap dimension L6 between the gears 340C and the drive teeth 340C is longer than the tooth gap dimensions L4 and L5 (L4, L5 <L6). These drive teeth 340A, 340B, and 340C are formed over about 1/3 of the circumferential surface, and the remaining 2/3 of the circumferential surface is a missing portion 341 in which the drive teeth are missing in the circumferential direction. Yes. That is, the pinion gear 331 has a meshing portion that has driving teeth and meshes with the rack gear 322, and a non-meshing portion that does not have driving teeth and does not mesh with the rack gear 322 on the peripheral surface.

  In this embodiment, in the pinion gear 331, the clockwise direction in FIG. 7A is the first operating direction for moving the rack gear 322 from the second position to the first position, that is, the first direction, and the counterclockwise direction is counterclockwise. This is a second operation direction in which the rack gear 322 is moved from the first position to the second position, that is, in the second direction.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the rack gear 322 is a gear in which a plurality of driven teeth protrude from a part of the side surface of the rod-shaped member. The driven teeth include a plurality of driven teeth 350A projecting along the side surface on the pinion gear 331 side, a driven tooth 350B having a tooth thickness dimension L12 larger than a tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 350A at a position where the drive teeth mesh, The thickness dimension L13 has the driven tooth 350C longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the driven teeth 350A and 350B (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12 <L13). Moreover, the front end surface of each driven tooth 350A, 350B, 350C is a flat surface.

  The tooth gap dimension L14 between each driven tooth 350A and the driven tooth 350A and the tooth gap dimension L15 between the driven tooth 350A and the driven tooth 350C are the same (tooth gap dimension L14 = L15), and the driven tooth 350A. The tooth gap dimension L16 between the tooth and the driven tooth 350B is longer than the tooth gap dimensions L14 and L15 (L14, L15 <L16).

  The tooth gap dimensions L14 and L15 of the rack gear 322 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L1 of the drive tooth 340A, and the tooth gap dimensions L16 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L2 of the drive tooth 340B. . Further, the tooth gap dimensions L4 and L5 in the pinion gear 331 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L11 of the driven tooth 350A, and the tooth gap dimensions L6 are dimensions corresponding to the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C. .

  These driven teeth 350A, 350B, and 350C are formed from the lower part in the longitudinal direction of the side surface to the substantially vertical center, and the upper part from the center is a missing part 351 in which the driven tooth is missing in the longitudinal direction. That is, the rack gear 322 has a meshing portion that has driven teeth and meshes with the pinion gear 331 and a non-meshing portion that does not have driven gears and does not mesh with the pinion gear 331 on the side surface.

  In this embodiment, the rack gear 322 moves between the upper second position and the lower first position in FIG. That is, the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operation direction to move from the second position to the first position, that is, moves in the first direction, and the pinion gear 331 rotates in the second operation direction from the first position to the second position. It moves to the position, that is, in the second direction.

  Next, operation modes of the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, since the movable member 321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable part 302 is in the standing position, in the following, when the movable part 302 is in the standing position, Description will be made with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the movable member 321 reciprocates between the first position and the second position when the movable part 302 is in the standing position will be described. However, when the movable part 302 is in the tilted position, The movable member 321 may reciprocate between the first position and the second position during the rotation.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the movable member 321 (rack gear 322) has a first position below the rotating member 320 where the boss 334 b is positioned at the lower end of the slide groove 329. The boss 334a can reciprocate in the vertical direction between the upper second position located at the upper end of the slide groove 329.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the movable member 321 is subjected to an upward biasing force by the tension spring 323 at the first position, but the pinion gear 331 and the rack gear 322 are driven by a drive tooth 340C as will be described later. When the tip of the follower tooth 350C of the leading end surface 342C of the first contact surface 342C comes into contact, the state changes to a restricted state (locked state) that restricts the upward movement of the movable member 321 due to the urging force of the tension spring 323. Even when the motor 330 is off, the movable member 321 is held in the first position. The details of the restricted state (locked state) will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, when the restriction state is released, the movable member 321 is moved upward by the urging force of the tension spring 323 and then held at the second position by the tension spring 323. That is, the urging force by the tension spring 323 exceeds the load of the movable member 321.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10A, the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction as shown in FIG. 10B in a state where the drive teeth 340B mesh with the corresponding driven teeth 350B from above. Thus, the drive teeth 340A and the corresponding driven teeth 350A mesh with each other, and the rack gear 322 moves in the first direction (downward) against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323. Then, as shown in FIG. 10C, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C, and the rack gear 322, that is, the movable member 321 is held at the first position. The

  Here, the details when changing from the restriction release state to the restriction state (lock state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the movable member 321 is in the second position, the drive teeth 340A and 340B mesh with the driven teeth 350A and 350B as the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operating direction. Thus, the rack gear 322 moves in the first direction against the upward biasing force of the tension spring 323, and the movable member 321 descends toward the first position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11A, before the engagement of the drive teeth 340A adjacent to the drive teeth 340C among the plurality and the driven teeth 350A adjacent to the driven teeth 350C of the plurality is released, the drive teeth 340C are released. And the driven teeth 350C are meshed, and the meshing of the drive teeth 340A and the driven teeth 350A is released. Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, after the drive teeth 340C face the missing portion 351 of the rack gear 322, the tooth tips of the drive teeth 340C move from the tooth roots of the tooth surfaces of the driven teeth 350C toward the tooth tips. I will do it.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, when the tooth tip of the driving tooth 340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C by the rotation of the pinion gear 331, the meshing of the driving tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released. That is, the drive tooth 340C is an adjacent drive tooth adjacent to the missing portion 341, and the driven tooth 350C is an adjacent driven tooth adjacent to the missing portion 351 (the drive tooth 340C is the rear of the first direction among the plurality of driven teeth. Since the transmission of the power to move the rack gear 322 in the first direction is interrupted by the meshing of the subsequent drive teeth and the driven teeth, the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped. Thus, when the tooth tip of the drive tooth 340C is separated from the tooth surface of the driven tooth 350C and the engagement between the drive tooth 340C and the driven tooth 350C is released, the rack gear 322 tries to move in the second direction by the urging force of the tension spring 323. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 11C, when the pinion gear 331 further rotates, the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C intersects the tooth tip line T passing through the tooth tips of the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C of the rack gear 322. To do. At this time, as described above, the transmission of the power for moving the rack gear 322 in the first direction due to the meshing of the subsequent drive tooth and the driven tooth is interrupted, so that the rack gear 322 receives the first force by the urging force of the tension spring 323. In order to move in two directions, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C.

  Thus, after the contact point S with respect to the drive tooth 340C in the driven tooth 350C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 11A) to the tooth tip of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 11B). ), And moves to the tip surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C (see FIG. 11C). That is, it moves to the tip surface 342C so as to slide while being in sliding contact from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C toward the tooth tip.

  Thereafter, when the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C reaches the substantially central position in the circumferential direction on the tip surface 342C, the second effect motor 330 is turned off and the rotation of the pinion gear 331 is stopped (see FIG. 11D). . In this state, the tip end surface 342C is inclined to the rack gear 322 side in the second direction so as to intersect the tooth tip line T, and the rack gear 322 is directed upward by the biasing force of the tension spring 323. As a result, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C is pressed against the tip end surface 342C, and a restriction state (lock state) is established in which the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction is restricted. That is, the drive teeth 340 </ b> C and the driven teeth 350 </ b> C constitute restriction means for restricting the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction (upward direction).

  Further, the pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the front end surface 342C constituting the restricting portion is configured by a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331. Thus, as shown in FIG. 11C, after the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with respect to the drive tooth 340C moves from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C to the tip surface 342C, the pinion gear 331 reaches the position shown in FIG. Does not displace the contact point S between the driven tooth 350C and the tip end surface 342C in the second direction of the rack gear 322, so that the rack gear 322 moves slightly according to the rotation of the pinion gear 331, that is, the movable member 321. It is possible to prevent the player from slightly rising and making the player feel uncomfortable.

  For example, when the tip surface 342C constituting the restricting portion is a flat surface, as shown in FIG. 11C, the contact point S of the driven tooth 350C with the drive tooth 340C is changed from the tooth surface of the drive tooth 340C to the tip surface 342C. After the movement, when the pinion gear 331 rotates to the position shown in FIG. 11D, the contact point S ′ between the driven tooth 350C and the tip surface 342C is displaced in the second direction of the rack gear 322. Further, when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction to release the restricted state, the urging force by the tension spring 323 is increased as compared with the case where the distal end surface 342C is a curved surface, and therefore for the second effect. The load applied to the motor 330 is increased. Therefore, it is preferable that the front end surface 342C is configured by a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331.

  In this embodiment, since the second effect motor 330 is a stepping motor, the pinion gear 331 is arranged so that the drive teeth 340C stop at the restricting position shown in FIG. 11D by the number of steps (rotation angle) from the reference position. For example, a sensor for detecting that the drive tooth 340C is in the restriction position shown in FIG. 11D is provided, and the pinion gear 331 is rotated based on the detection state from the sensor. You may make it stop.

  In addition, for example, stop positions for stopping the rotation of the pinion gear 331 when changing to the restricted state are set at a plurality of locations within the range where the driven teeth 350C abut on the tip surface 342C, and stopped at different locations every predetermined number of times. By doing so, it is possible to avoid local deformation of the tip surface 342C due to wear due to repeated stops. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to extend the distal end surface 342C over the circumferential direction of the missing portion 341.

  Next, a method for canceling the restricted state will be described. First, in the restricted state shown in FIG. 12A, by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction, the drive teeth 340C move and the tooth tips of the driven teeth 350C move away from the tip surface 342C, and the missing portion 341 When the intersection of the tip surface 342C and the tooth tip line T is released facing the rack gear 322, the restriction of the driven tooth 350C by the tip surface 342C is released, and the regulation state is changed to the regulation release state.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, the rack gear 322 is lifted in the second direction by the tensile force of the tension spring 323 when the restriction is released, so that the movable member 321 moves from the first position toward the second position. Move at high speed. Further, in this embodiment, since the first position is the driving initial position, as shown in FIG. 12C, the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operating direction after the change to the restriction release state, and the driving is performed. When the tooth 340B reaches the position where it engages with the driven tooth 350B, the second effect motor 330 is turned off to stop the rotation of the pinion gear 331.

  Therefore, when moving the movable member 321 from the second position to the first position, the pinion gear 331 is further rotated in the first operation direction, so that the rack gear is engaged with the drive teeth 340B and 340A and the driven teeth 350B and 350A. 322 can be moved in the first direction. In this way, the movable member 321 can be moved from the first position to the second position and can be moved from the second position to the first position by simply rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction. The control load of the effect control CPU 120 that controls the second effect motor 330 can be reduced.

  FIG. 13 shows another example of the method for canceling the restricted state. In the restricted state shown in FIG. 13 (A), by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operation direction opposite to the first operation direction, the drive teeth 340C move and the tooth tips of the driven teeth 350C move from the tip surface 342C. The intersection between the tip surface 342C and the tooth tip line T is released, but the driven tooth 350C enters the tooth gap between the driving tooth 340C and the driving tooth 340A, and as shown in FIG. Since the tooth surface of the tooth 350C contacts with the tooth surface of the driving tooth 340C, the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction by the tension spring 323 is restricted by the contact with the driving tooth 340C.

  Therefore, the rack gear 322 can be raised by the rotation of the pinion gear 331 by further rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operation direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 12, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operating direction in the restricted state, the movable member 321 is moved from the first position at a predetermined speed by the urging force of the tension spring 323. As shown in FIG. 13, when the restricted state is released by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the second operating direction in the restricted state, the movable member 321 is moved from the first position to the second position at an arbitrary speed. It can be moved to a position.

  Specifically, if the pinion gear 331 is rotated at a low speed, the movable member 321 can be raised at a low speed, and if the pinion gear 331 is rotated at a high speed, the movable member 321 can be raised at a high speed. Moreover, it can be raised in various ways, such as being stopped while being raised, or moved up and down.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pinion gear 331 as a drive gear rotated (actuated) by the second effect motor 330 as a drive source and the rack gear as a driven gear meshed with the pinion gear 331. 322, and the rack gear 322 is urged by a tension spring 323 in a second direction opposite to the first direction moved (operated) by the pinion gear 331. The pinion gear 331 is driven by the drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C. And a tip surface 342C as a restricting portion provided at the tip of the driving tooth 340C as an adjacent driving tooth adjacent to the missing portion 341. The driving tooth 340C and the rack gear 322 After the meshing with the driven tooth 350C is released, the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the tip surface 342C. Movement in the second direction of the rack gear 322 is restricted.

  That is, when the engagement between the drive teeth 340C and the driven teeth 350C is released and the missing portion 341 faces the rack gear 322, the driven teeth 350C of the rack gear 322 biased in the second direction come into contact with the tip surface 342C. Movement in the second direction is restricted. As described above, the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction can be restricted by using the front end surface 342C provided on the drive teeth 340C of the pinion gear 331, so that the rack gear 322 and the movable member 321 move in the first direction. The operation of the rack gear 322 can be stopped with a simple structure of the driving gear and the driven gear without increasing the number of parts by providing a regulating means for regulating the noise separately.

  In the above embodiment, the rack gear 322, which is a driven gear, is biased in the second direction by the tension spring 323. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the driven gear is a biasing means other than the spring member. May be biased in the second direction. Further, for example, when the movable portion 302 is provided upside down, the rack gear 322 is always urged downward (second direction) due to the load of the movable member 321, and thus is urged in the second direction by its own weight. Are also included.

  The pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the rack gear 322 has a first position (position shown in FIG. 8A) and a second position different from the first position (FIG. 8 ( C), and the pinion gear 331 rotates in the first operation direction that operates the rack gear 322 in the first direction, so that the drive teeth 340A, 340B, 340C and the driven teeth 350A, After moving from the second position to the first position by meshing with 350B and 350C, the missing portion 341 faces and the meshing between the drive teeth 340A, 340B and 340C and the driven teeth 350A, 350B and 350C is released, It is biased in the second direction by the tension spring 323 and operates from the first position to the second position.

  As described above, the rack gear 322 can be reciprocated only by rotating the pinion gear 331 in the first operation direction, so that the control load of the second effect motor 330 can be reduced.

  Further, when the driven tooth 350C comes into contact with the front end surface 342C, the restricted state in which the movement of the rack gear 322 in the second direction is restricted. The pinion gear 331 is moved in the first direction as shown in FIG. It can be released by operating in the first operating direction to be operated or in the second operating direction opposite to the first operating direction as shown in FIG.

  By doing so, if the restricted state is not released even if the pinion gear 331 is rotated in one of the first operating direction and the second operating direction, the rack gear 322 is released by operating in the other direction. This makes it easy to avoid that the driven tooth 350C is engaged with the tip end surface 342C and cannot move the rack gear 322.

  Further, in the restricted state, the operation mode of the rack gear 322 differs between when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction and when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the second operation direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12B, when the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the first operation direction, the rack gear 322 is raised by the urging force of the tension spring 323, and as shown in FIG. 13B. When the pinion gear 331 is rotated in the second operation direction, the rack gear 322 is raised according to the rotation of the pinion gear 331, so that the operation mode of the movable member 321 integrated with the rack gear 322 can be diversified.

  Further, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive teeth 340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B (for example, the tooth thickness dimension L1 <L2 <L3). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied to the drive teeth 340C when the meshed state is changed from the non-engaged state not meshed with the driven teeth 350A, 350B, 350C. In addition, since the tooth thickness dimension L3 is widened, the tip end surface 342C constituting the restricting portion is also widened, which makes it easy to restrict the driven tooth 350C.

  The pinion gear 331 is a gear that is rotated by the second effect motor 330, and the distal end surface 342C that constitutes the restricting portion is configured by a curved surface that follows an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a of the pinion gear 331. Even if the pinion gear 331 rotates while the driven tooth 350C is in contact with the front end surface 342C, the contact point S between the driven tooth 350C and the front end surface 342C is not displaced in the moving direction of the rack gear 322. As a result, the rack gear 322 can be prevented from finely moving according to the rotation.

  Further, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C meshing with the drive tooth 340C in the driven tooth is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 350B and 350C (tooth thickness dimension L11 <L12). <L13) By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage or the like due to a load applied to the driven tooth 350C when the meshed state is changed from the non-engaged state that is not meshed with the drive tooth 340C. Further, it is possible to prevent damage due to a load applied by a force biased in the second direction in a state where the contact portion is in contact with the restriction portion.

[Direction unit cable]
With reference to FIGS. 3, 8, and 9, the rendering unit 300 is provided with a cable 361 that supplies power to the LED of the light emitting unit 321 </ b> A of the movable member 321.

  FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B schematically show the side surfaces of FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, respectively. In FIG. 9, the distance between the movable member 321 and the rotating member 320 and the distance between the rotating member 320 and the rack gear 322 are drawn wider for the sake of clarity. It is narrower than.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the cable 361 is moved from the connector 363 provided on the relay board from the effect control board 12 of the base 301 to the movable member 321 via the pressing member 364 of the cable 361 provided on the rotating member 320. The LED of the light emitting unit 321A is connected to a connector 362 provided on the LED board on which the LED is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the movable member 321 is waiting in the first position, the portion between the pressing member 364 and the connector 362 of the cable 361 is considerably bent. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the movable member 321 is advanced to the second position, the portion between the pressing member 364 of the cable 361 and the connector 362 is extended and there is not much room. Become.

  For this reason, a force in a direction from the second position toward the first position is applied to the movable member 321 by the cable 361. When the cable 361 is stretched, the covering material of the cable 361 is resin. Therefore, when the cable 361 is cold, the force applied to the movable member 321 by the cable 361 is less than when the cable 361 is cold. Become stronger.

  The tension spring 323 is pulled by the second effect motor 330 until the movable member 321 reaches the second position. For this reason, the second performance motor 330 can generate a force stronger than the tensile force (biasing force) in a state where the tension spring 323 is most pulled.

  As described above, the urging force by the tension spring 323 exceeds the load of the movable member 321. However, when the urging force by the tension spring 323 is increased, the output of the second effect motor 330 that pulls the tension spring 323 needs to be increased. When a motor with a large output is used, the manufacturing cost increases, and therefore it is preferable that the output of the motor be the minimum necessary.

  As the tension spring 323, not only the load of the movable member 321 but also the force of pulling the movable member 321 when the cable 361 is extended and the cost of the second performance motor 330 are taken into consideration. A spring is used to obtain power.

  For this reason, in the unlikely event that a cable 361 having poor quality is used and it becomes hard at a low temperature, it is considered that the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient when the movable member 321 is first moved. Normally, cables that are harder than expected at low temperatures are not used.

  However, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has been left and cooled at night is started in order to prevent a situation in which the biasing force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient, a later-described FIG. As shown in step S515, a break-in operation is performed to acclimatize the movement of the movable member 321. By performing the running-in operation of moving the movable member 321 from the first position to the second position, the cable 361 can be bent and stretched, so that the cable 361 can be used flexibly. As a result, a situation where the urging force of the tension spring 323 is insufficient can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the cable 361 is in the vicinity of an object that generates heat (the effect display device 5, the first effect motor 303, and the second effect motor 330). Since the cable 361 is provided, the cable 361 is kept in a highly flexible state by heat.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the movable member break-in process (S51A) in the effect control main process. Referring to FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first effect motor 303 to move the movable portion 302 to the standing position (S <b> 511).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable portion 302 (S512). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S512), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the abnormality of the movable unit 302 (S513). The notification is performed by display on the effect display device 5 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation for stopping the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the amusement store (S514). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable unit 302 has not been detected (NO in S512), and when it has been determined that an operation to stop notification has been performed (YES in S514), the effect control CPU 120 is movable. The second effect motor 330 is controlled to move the member 321 to the first position (S515). Here, the movable member 321 may be reciprocated between the second position and the first position.

  Thus, since the movable member is moved by the second effect motor 330 having a stronger force than the tension spring 323, the movable member 321 can be moved more reliably. Accordingly, the movement of the cable 361 and the movable member 321 can be accustomed by changing the cable 361 from the bent state to the extended state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality has been detected in the movement of the movable member 321 (S516). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S516), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the abnormality of the movable member 321 (S517). The notification is performed by display on the effect display device 5 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation for stopping the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the game store (S518). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable member 321 is not detected (NO in S516), and when it is determined that an operation for stopping the notification is performed (YES in S518), the effect control CPU 120 executes Return the process to be performed to the caller of this process.

[Modification of movable part drive mechanism]
Next, a modified example of the movable part driving mechanism will be described. FIGS. 19A to 19D are explanatory diagrams illustrating a situation in which the restriction unit serving as the first modification of the movable part driving mechanism is changed to a restricted state. FIGS. 20A to 20D are explanatory views showing a situation in which the state is changed to the restricted state by the restricting means as the second modification of the movable portion driving mechanism. FIGS. 21A to 21D are explanatory diagrams illustrating a situation in which a restriction unit serving as a third modification of the movable part drive mechanism is changed to a restricted state. 22A is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as a fourth modification of the movable portion drive mechanism, and FIG. 22B is an explanatory view showing a restricting portion as the fifth modification of the movable portion driving mechanism.

  In the embodiment, the pinion gear 331 is applied as an example of the drive gear, and the rack gear 322 is applied as an example of the driven gear. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the drive gear and the driven gear are not limited thereto. The type of can be changed variously.

  For example, as in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 19, both the drive gear G1 and the driven gear G2 are rotating gears, and as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19D, the drive gear G1 is moved in the first operating direction. By rotating, the driven tooth 410 is brought into contact with the tip surface 402 of the driving tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of driving teeth, and the movement state of the driven gear G2 in the second direction is restricted. can do.

  Thus, a rotating gear may be applied as the driven gear. In the above embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 350C that meshes with the drive tooth 340C as the adjacent drive tooth is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L11 and L12 of the other driven teeth 350B and 350C. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L13 of the driven tooth 410 meshing with the drive tooth 400 as the adjacent drive tooth is greater than the tooth thickness dimensions L11, 12 of the other driven teeth. May not be long.

  20, the drive gear G3 is a rack gear, the driven gear G4 is a rotating gear, and the drive gear G3 is moved in the first operation direction as shown in FIGS. By moving, the driven tooth 410 of the driving tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of driving teeth is brought into contact with the driven tooth 410, and a controlled state in which the movement of the driven gear G4 in the second direction is restricted. be able to. Thus, a rack gear may be applied as the drive gear.

  In the embodiment, the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive tooth 340C as the adjacent drive tooth having the tip surface 342C as the restricting portion is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the tooth thickness dimension L3 of the drive teeth 340C is longer than the tooth thickness dimensions L1 and L2 of the other drive teeth 340A and 340B. It does not have to be.

  Specifically, the driving gear G5 is a rotating gear, the driven gear G6 is a rack gear, as in Modification 3 shown in FIG. 21, and the driving gear G5 is a first gear as shown in FIGS. By moving in the operating direction, the driven tooth 410 of the driving tooth 400 adjacent to the missing portion 401 among the plurality of driving teeth is brought into contact with the driven tooth 410, and movement of the driven gear G6 in the second direction is restricted. It can be in a regulated state. Thus, the circumferential length of the tip surface 402 of the driving tooth 400 as the adjacent driving tooth does not necessarily have to be longer than the circumferential length of the tip surface of the other driving teeth. As shown in FIG. 21 (D), when the tip surface 402 crosses the tooth tip line T, it is substantially the same as or shorter than the circumferential length of the tip surface of the other drive teeth. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the front end surface 342C as the restricting portion is a curved surface along an arc centered on the drive shaft 330a. However, the movable portion drive mechanism is not limited to this, for example, Further, it may be constituted by a flat surface, a spherical surface or a concave surface. Further, as shown in Modification 4 of FIG. 22A, by forming a locking recess 420 or the like that can lock the driven tooth 350C on a part of the tip surface or in the entire tip surface, the driven tooth 350C is formed. Even if it slides on the front end surface 342C, the tooth tip of the driven tooth 350C is easily engaged with the engaging recess 420, so that the driven tooth 350C slides on the front end surface 342C as the restricting portion to be in a restricted state. It can suppress becoming difficult to change.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the front end surface 342C of the drive tooth 340C adjacent to the missing part 341 was applied as an example of the restriction part, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and the restriction part Is not limited to that constituted by the tip surface of the drive teeth, and as shown in Modification 5 of FIG. 22B, the tip surface 342C of the drive teeth 340C and the missing portion from the tip surface 342C It is good also as a control surface comprised by the extended surface 430 extended to the 341 side. That is, the restricting portion is not only formed by the tip surface of the drive tooth, but may be configured at a portion that does not function as the drive tooth, such as an extended surface extending from the tip surface to the missing portion side. Good.

  Further, the length dimension in the operation direction of the regulating surface composed of the front end surface 342C and the extending surface 430 constituting the regulating portion is not limited to those described in the above-described embodiment and modification examples. A regulating surface such as the installation surface 430 may be extended along the longitudinal direction of the missing portion 341.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment and the modifications 1-4, the drive gear had the missing part which the drive tooth missing on the back side of the 1st operation direction of the adjacent drive tooth, but a missing part is a drive tooth. For example, a gear in which drive teeth are formed only on the arc of a fan-shaped gear, or a rack gear in which adjacent drive teeth are formed at the rear end of the first operation direction are also missing portions. Will have.

  In addition, the driven gear also has a missing portion in which the driven tooth on the rear side in the first direction is missing. For example, a gear in which the driven tooth is formed only on the arc of the fan-shaped gear or an adjacent drive tooth The rack gear or the like in which the driven teeth that mesh with the rear end portion are formed at the rear end portion in the first direction also has a missing portion.

  In the above embodiment, the rack gear and the pinion gear are applied as the types of the drive gear and the driven gear. However, the movable part drive mechanism is not limited to this, and a spur gear, a bevel gear, a helical gear, etc. May be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the pinion gear 331 fixed to the drive shaft 330a of the second effect motor 330 is used as the drive gear, and the rack gear 322 integrated with the movable member 321 is used as the driven gear. The partial drive mechanism is not limited to this, and it is only necessary that two gears meshed with each other among the plurality of gears driven by the drive source are the drive gear and the driven gear. For example, a gear that directly or indirectly meshes with the pinion gear 331 may be a drive gear, and a gear that meshes with the drive gear may be a driven gear. Further, the movable member 321 may not be provided directly on the rack gear 322 that is a driven gear. For example, the movable member 321 may be provided on a part of a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the rack gear 322.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the drive gear and the driven gear were applied as a drive mechanism which moves the movable member 321 between the 1st position and the 2nd position with respect to the rotation member 320, to this, For example, the driving gear and the driven gear described above may be applied as a driving mechanism for driving the movable portion 302 between the tilt position and the standing position, or other movable effects. You may apply as a drive mechanism of a unit. In addition to those that are applied to the drive mechanism that drives the movable part for production in this way, for example, a drive mechanism that opens and closes the door for the special prize winning device 7 and the like, etc. You may apply as a drive mechanism of a part.

[Example of production using movable members]
Next, a production example using the movable member 321 will be described. FIG. 23 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 5 when the battle reach effect is executed. FIG. 24 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 5 when the story reach effect is executed.

  The battle reach effect and the story reach effect are executed by the effect control CPU 120. Battle reach production and story reach production are multiple types of special reach production (supermarkets) that have a higher percentage of selections that result in jackpot display results compared to normal reach production called normal reach. It is a specific super reach production included in the “reach production”. Furthermore, in these super reach productions, the jackpot expectation is set, for example, as a relationship of battle reach production <story reach production. Note that the expectation of jackpot between the battle reach production and the story reach production may be reversed.

  Each of the battle reach effect and the story reach effect is an effect in which the effect display by the image display of the effect display device 5 and the effect operation of the movable member 321 are combined.

  The battle reach effect shown in FIG. 23 will be described. In the effect symbol variation display, the effect symbol variation display is started simultaneously in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In accordance with a predetermined stop order such as “medium”, the variation display of the effect symbols is sequentially stopped in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, and finally the effect symbols are stopped in all the effect symbol display areas. Thus, when the display result is derived and displayed, the variable display ends.

  After the effect symbols change display is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped, the same symbol is stopped. It becomes a state. The variation display until the timing of reaching the reach state is executed in a normal variation display effect mode that does not differ between normal reach and super reach. The normal reach and the super reach differ in the production mode after reaching the reach state.

  When the battle reach effect is executed as the reach effect, the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are reduced as shown in FIG. In a small symbol display format, it is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 53 indicating “battle reach” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the battle reach effect is executed.

  In the battle reach production, as shown in FIGS. 23C to 23E, a video in which a teammate character 61 (player's teammate side) and an enemy character 62 (player's teammate side) battle each other (battle). A battle effect that displays an image (effect including the output of the sound effect during the battle and the music sound during the battle) is executed.

  In the battle reach effect, when the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, a victory effect image display in which the teammate character 61 wins is displayed as shown in FIG. 23 (E), and further, in FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E). As shown, an image in which the particle effect image 71 is superimposed on the victory effect image is displayed, and the movable member 321 moves to the standing position, and the victory effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 is executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the fluctuation display result becomes the deviated display result, a defeat effect that displays an image in which the teammate character 61 loses is performed, and the particle effect image 71 as shown in FIGS. And the effect using the movable member 321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the battle effect, after the display that the teammate character 61 and the enemy character 62 appear as shown in FIG. 23C, the teammate character 61 and the enemy character are displayed as shown in FIG. A moving image in which 62 battles (battles) is displayed. For example, FIG. 23D shows a scene in which the teammate character 61 attacks the enemy character 62. As shown in FIG. 23D, in a battle effect, in a scene where the teammate character 61 attacks (a scene suggesting victory), a particle effect image as a display effect display in the area at the bottom center of the screen of the effect display device 5 71 is made to appear and a particle effect effect is displayed in a superimposed manner on the victory effect display. When the teammate character 61 wins, as shown in FIG. 23E, a victory effect is displayed in which an image that can identify that the teammate character 61 has beaten the enemy character 62 and the teammate character 61 has won is displayed. Is done. In the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (E), the movable member operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 5 is obtained by moving the movable member 321 to the standing position. Is done. The appearing movable member 321 is caused to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 23E, when the movable member 321 appears due to the movable body operation effect and moves to the standing position, the number of appearances of the particle effect image 71 to be superimposed is increased around the movable member 321. Thus, a moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the particle effect image 71 is expanded is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed using the particle effect image 71 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 321 and is called an operation effect effect. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 321 and the display mode of the particle effect image 71 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (F), in the effect design that was displayed in the small design format, the jackpot display result (same design stop) is derived and displayed, and the message image 55 showing the characters “Congratulations” is displayed. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the player has won the battle reach effect (having a big hit). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (G), the effect symbol in which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 74 showing the word “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  On the other hand, in the battle reach effect, when the fluctuation display result becomes the display error result, the defeat effect described above is executed, and the display error result is derived and displayed in the effect symbol displayed in the small symbol format. The original size and the original position are restored and displayed.

  Next, the story reach production shown in FIG. 24 will be described. After the display of variation of the effect symbols is started all at once, as shown in FIG. 24A, after the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped to reach the reach state, the reach effect is obtained. When the story reach effect is executed, first, the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are reduced as shown in FIG. In a small symbol display format, it is moved and displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a message image 54A showing the characters “first half of the story” is displayed in the center of the screen. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach effect is executed.

  The story reach effect is an effect in which a moving image (story moving image) having a story like a specific story is displayed, for example. In this example, the story reach production has a two-part configuration of a first half and a second half. Story reach production is when the story is not completed and the production ends and the display result is derived and displayed, and when the story continues to the end and the production is completed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed. There is.

  When the variable display result is an outlier display result, the effect that the story reach effect ends in the first half is executed, and when the variable display result becomes the jackpot display result, the story reach effect continues from the first half to the second half. An effect that continues up to may be executed.

  In addition, the story reach production may be set so that the performance is selected so that the person who has performed until the end has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the case where the production is finished in the first half . Further, the story reach production may be a one-part configuration that is not divided into a first half and a second half.

  After the message image 54A is displayed, a moving image developed in accordance with the story corresponding to the “first half of the story” is displayed. When the “first half of the story” is finished and the “second half of the story” is subsequently executed, a message image 54B in which the letters “second half of the story” are displayed is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. The Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is continuously executed. In the story reach effect, an image for notifying that it is a story reach effect such as the message images 54A and 54B may not be displayed.

  After the message image 54B is displayed, a moving image developed according to the story corresponding to the “second half of the story” is displayed. In the story reach production, when the variable display result is the jackpot display result, the flame effect image 73 is superimposed on the black image 72 as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24E, the movable member 321 moves to the standing position, and the story completion effect that appears in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the story reach effect, when the variable display result is an outlier display result, a story incomplete effect that can specify that the story is not complete is performed, and a black image 72 as shown in FIGS. The effect using the flame effect image 73 and the movable member 321 is not executed.

  Specifically, in the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (D), the entire display area of the effect display device 5 is changed to a black image 72, and in the area at the lower center of the screen of the effect display device 5, An effect of superimposing and displaying the flame effect image 73 as an effect display on the black image 72 is performed. In the story completion effect, as shown in FIG. 24E, the movable body operation effect that appears in the central area of the display area of the effect display device 5 by moving the movable member 321 to the standing position. Is done. The appearing movable member 321 is caused to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 24E, when the movable member 321 appears due to the movable body operation effect and moves to the standing position, the flame of the flame effect image 73 to be superimposed is increased around the movable member 321 and the flame is increased. A moving image showing a display mode in which the display range of the effect image 73 is enlarged is displayed. The moving image is an effect executed using the flame effect image 73 in order to enhance the effect based on the operation of the movable member 321, and is called an operation effect effect as in the case of FIG. By such an operation effect effect, an effect related to the operation mode of the movable member 321 and the display mode of the flame effect image 73 is executed. By executing such an effect, it is possible to produce an effect in which the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means are linked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (F), a message image 55 showing a congratulations message is displayed, with the jackpot display result (same design stop) derived and displayed in the effect design displayed in the small symbol format. , It is displayed in the center of the screen as a reach result effect which is an effect indicating the result of the reach state. Thereby, it is notified that the story reach production is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (G), the effect symbol in which the big hit display result is displayed in the small symbol format is returned to the original size and the original position as shown in FIG. A stop symbol effect is displayed in which a message image 74 showing the word “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol.

  In the story reach effect, the effect image is displayed in the same manner as in the battle reach effect. However, unlike the battle reach effect, the entire display area of the effect display device 5 is set as a black image, and the effect image is superimposed on the black image. Thus, the effect image can be displayed with further emphasis, and an image display having a higher effect than the battle reach effect can be executed. Thereby, the precious feeling (premiere feeling) of the story reach production in which the expectation degree to the big hit is set higher than the battle reach production can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the story reach production, when the fluctuation display result becomes the out-of-order display result, the above-mentioned story incomplete production is executed, and the out-of-order display result is derived and displayed in the production design displayed in the small design format. Will return to the original size and position and be displayed.

  The movable member 321 may be configured such that a disk-shaped portion can be rotated by a driving means such as a motor that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120. In the case where the disk-shaped portion of the movable member 321 is configured so as to be capable of rotation control, the movable member 321 moves to the upright position as shown in FIG. When it appears in front of the display area of the device 5, or when it appears, it may be controlled to rotate the disk-shaped part. In that case, in accordance with the rotation operation of the movable member 321, an image for operating the effect image such as the particle effect image 71 of FIG. 23E and the flame effect image 73 of FIG. The effect control to be displayed may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect obtained by using the movable member 321 and the effect image.

  In addition, the movable member 321 is not limited to a rotating operation, and a part or all of the constituent members perform a deformation operation such as opening and closing or contracting by a driving unit such as a solenoid that is driven and controlled by the effect control CPU 120. In the case of such a configuration, a display on the effect display device 5 is performed in accordance with the deformation operation of the movable member located in front of the display area of the effect display device 5 in a specific effect scene. Effect control for displaying an image for operating the effect image to be performed may be executed.

  Next, a control example of effect effects and movable body effects in specific super reach effects such as battle reach effects and story reach effects will be described using timing charts.

  FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing an example of control of effect effects and movable body effects in a specific super reach effect. FIG. 25A shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the battle reach effect as shown in FIG. FIG. 25B shows a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect as shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 25A, a control example of an effect effect and a movable object effect in a battle reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the battle reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 23 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  In the effect display device 5, when a reach state occurs, a message image 53 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 23B and 23C, and a moving image such as a battle effect corresponding to the battle reach effect is displayed. Is done. As shown in FIGS. 23D and 23E in the effect display device 5, the timing of changing from the image display of the battle effect to the image display of the victory effect is the milestone of the first change in the video related to the battle reach effect ( This is the time when the video cut breaks. At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change regarding such battle reach effect, the particle effect image is displayed on the battle effect image as shown in FIGS. This is executed in such a manner that a particle effect effect in which an image on which 71 is superimposed is displayed on the effect display device 5 and a movable body operation effect for operating the movable member 321 are linked.

  The timing at which the movable member 321 moves to the standing position as shown in FIGS. 23E and 23F in the effect display device 5 and changes from the image display of the victory effect to the image display of the reach result effect is battle reach. This is a time when the second change of the video related to the production (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) of the second video change relating to such battle reach effect, the particle effect image 71 is superimposed on the victory effect image as shown in FIG. Operation effect effects such as images to be displayed are executed in the effect display device 5.

  Then, when the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are completed, the reach result is displayed by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the reach result effect is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 23 (G) is executed in the effect display device 5, whereby a display for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed and a variable display is performed. finish.

  As described above, in the battle reach effect, the effect effect display in which the particle effect image 71 is superimposed and displayed on the black image 72 is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect. Further, in the battle reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 321 and the effect effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 (B), a control example of the effect effect and the movable object effect in the story reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described. When the story reach effect is executed, the effect symbol is displayed in the normal variation display effect mode as shown in FIG. 24 (A) between the start of the change display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state. Is displayed on the effect display device 5.

  In the effect display device 5, when a reach state occurs, message images 54A and 54B are displayed as shown in FIGS. 24B and 24C, and a moving image such as a story moving image corresponding to the story reach effect is displayed. An image is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 24D and 24E in the effect display device 5, the timing of changing from the image display of the story effect to the image display of the story completion effect is the milestone of the first change in the video related to the story reach effect. This is the time when the video cut breaks. At the timing (first video change node) of the first video change relating to such story reach production, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 72 as shown in FIGS. This is executed in a manner in which a flame effect effect in which an image displaying 73 is superimposed on the effect display device 5 and a movable body operation effect for operating the movable member 321 are linked.

  The timing at which the movable member 321 moves to the standing position as shown in FIGS. 24E and 24F in the effect display device 5 and changes from the image display of the story completion effect to the image display of the reach result effect is the story. This is the time when the second change in the video related to the reach production will be a turning point (video cut break). At the timing (second video change node) of the second video change relating to such story reach production, the flame effect image 73 is superimposed on the black image 72 as shown in FIG. Operation effect effects such as images to be performed are executed in the effect display device 5.

  Then, when the operation effect effect and the movable body operation effect are finished, the reach result is displayed by executing the image display of the reach result effect as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the reach result effect is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 24G is executed in the effect display device 5, whereby a display for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed and a variable display is performed. finish.

  Thus, in the story reach effect, the effect effect display is performed such that the flame effect image 73 is superimposed on the black image 72 at the timing of the change in the video related to the reach effect. Further, in the story reach effect, an effect in which the movable body effect such as the movable member 321 and the effect effect display are linked is executed at the timing of the change of the video related to the reach effect.

  Specifically, in the battle reach effects shown in FIGS. 23 and 25A and the story reach effects shown in FIGS. 24 and 25B, the CPU 120 for effect control performs the following processing. Is realized.

  When the effect control board 12 receives a change pattern command specifying a change pattern of a super reach type that executes a battle reach effect among the change pattern commands of the super reach as the change pattern command (change pattern specifying command). The effect control CPU 120 performs the image display control of the effect display device 5 that performs the battle reach effect and the operation control of the movable member 321 as shown in FIGS. 23 and 25A in the effect symbol variation start process (S74). The effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 122. The battle reach effect is partially different between when the fluctuation display result becomes a jackpot display result and when it becomes an outlier display result, so when a fluctuation pattern command or display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received In addition, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the change display result, and selects the effect control data according to the change display result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect symbol variation display, and in the effect symbol variation processing (S75), the effect control data set for executing the battle reach effect is used, and the movable object effect process and the effect are performed. By executing the effect display process and the like, the image display control of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 are performed, and the battle reach effect as shown in FIGS. 23 and 25A is executed.

  When a variation pattern command specifying a variation pattern of a super reach type for executing a story reach effect is received at the effect control board 12 as a variation pattern command (variation pattern designation command). The effect control CPU 120 performs the image display control of the effect display device 5 that performs the story reach effect and the operation control of the movable member 321 as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25B in the effect symbol variation start process (S74). The effect control data (process data, etc.) for performing is selected from a plurality of types of effect control data stored in advance and set (stored) in the RAM 122. Story reach production is partially different depending on whether the fluctuation display result is a jackpot display result or an outlier display result, so when a fluctuation pattern command or display result designation command that can identify the fluctuation display result is received In addition, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received command content to recognize the change display result, and selects the effect control data according to the change display result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect symbol variation display, and uses the effect control data set for executing the story reach effect in the effect symbol variation processing (S75), and the movable object effect process and effect. By executing the effect display processing or the like, the image display control of the effect display device 5 and the operation control of the movable member 321 are performed, and the story reach effect as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25B is executed.

  When a movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display, such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 23 and 25A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 24 and 25B. Depending on which type of effect display is performed, an effect effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the black image, and an effect effect display in which the effect image is superimposed on the effect image Since the effect effect display in a different mode can be displayed, it is possible to enhance the effect that links the operation of the movable body and the effect display of the display means.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 23E and 25A, a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 321 is executed is executed. 23D and 23E, it is possible to execute an effect in which an effect effect display in a specific mode such as the particle effect image 71 in FIGS. 23D and 23E is superimposed on a specific type of effect display such as a display of a victory effect image. Therefore, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5, and the operation of the movable body by the effect display of the specific type And the effect of displaying the effect of the display means can be further enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 24E and 25B, a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect in which a movable object effect for operating a movable object such as the movable member 321 is executed is executed. 24D, a specific effect display such as the flame effect image 73 shown in FIGS. 24D and 24E is applied to the predetermined image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5 such as the black image 72. Since the effect of superimposing display can be executed, it is possible to link the predetermined effect of the predetermined type in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5. Thus, it is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game by emphasizing the movable body effect.

  It should be noted that effects such as the aforementioned battle reach effect and story reach effect that link the movable body and effect effect display may be performed in reach effects other than super reach, or in effects other than reach effects. May be.

  In addition, the example in which the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above is executed at the timing that becomes the turning point of the change of the video related to the effect. Not limited to this, it may be executed at a timing other than the timing that becomes a turning point of the change of the video related to the effect, such as the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the execution of the effect.

  In addition, as the effect effect display in the effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display like the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the particle effect image and the flame effect image have been described as an example. Not limited to this, as the effect display, other types of effect display such as an effect image in the form of light emission may be used.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, different types of effect display can be displayed depending on which effect display is performed among the two types of effect display of battle reach effect and story reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display different types of effect display according to which of the three or more types of effect display is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the effect effect display in a different mode is displayed depending on which effect display is performed among a plurality of effect displays such as a battle reach effect and a story reach effect. The example in which the effect effect display mode is changed depending on whether the black image 72 is displayed or not is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example of changing the effect effect display mode, any type of effect display displays a black image, but the effect effect display type such as an effect image may be different. In this case, the effect effect display types may be different as long as any of the effect effect display components such as the shape, color, display range, and luminance of the effect effect display image is different.

  Moreover, as an effect of linking (linking) the movable body and the effect effect display as in the battle reach effect and the story reach effect described above, the effect effect display images as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are displayed first. Not only the effect of moving the movable body later, but also the effect of executing the image display of the effect effect display and the operation of the movable body at the same timing, and the image of the effect effect display after operating the movable body first An effect of displaying may be used.

  Moreover, as an effect using the black image 72 like the above-described story reach effect, an example in which the black image 72 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5 has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, control may be performed to display the black image 72 in a part of the display area in the effect display device 5 such as an area for displaying the effect image.

  In addition, as an effect of linking a movable body such as the movable member described above and an effect display such as an effect image, the movable body is operated in each of a plurality of types of effect display with different effects display conditions. When performing an effect, an effect may be executed in which an effect image display as a different type of effect display is displayed in association with the operation of the movable body, depending on the state of the effect display for operating the movable body. Good. For example, different types of effect image display may be executed in the following effects display situation. (A) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body before entering the reach state during the variation display of the effect symbol. (B) When displaying an effect image corresponding to operating the movable body at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous. (C) When displaying an effect image display corresponding to operating a movable body during execution of normal reach. (D) When displaying the effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the execution of the super reach effect. (E) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating the movable body at the time of the development of the production during the execution of the super-reach of the development production format in which the production content develops. (F) Corresponding to operating a movable body when a lottery effect (for example, an effect of drawing a lottery whether to be a promising big hit or a non-probable big hit) after notifying that a big hit display result has been obtained To display the effect image display. (G) When displaying an effect image display in response to operating the movable body during the production of the big hit gaming state. (H) When an effect image display is displayed in response to operating a movable body during a customer waiting demonstration display that is executed when no game is being played. It should be noted that at least two of the effect image displays executed in a plurality of types of effect display situations as described above may be different.

[Other production examples using movable members]
Next, other production examples using a movable body such as the movable member 321 will be described. The effects described below are executed by the CPU 120 for effect control. FIG. 26 is a timing chart showing an example of control of an effect effect and a movable body combined operation effect in a specific super reach effect.

  As a movable body such as the movable member 321 described above, a movable movable member that includes a plurality of movable members, is in a separated state in a normal state, and can be controlled to operate in a combined state in a specific state is used. Also good. The unitable movable member may be one in which a plurality of movable members are interlocked by driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of movable members. It may be interlocked by driving means (motor, solenoid, etc.).

  The description of the control example of FIG. 26 is omitted from the description duplicated with the control example of FIG. 25, and different parts from the control example of FIG. 25 are mainly described. FIG. 26 (A) shows a control example of an effect effect and a movable united effect in a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. FIG. 25B shows a control example of an effect effect and a movable united effect in a story reach effect as shown in FIG.

  The control example of FIG. 26 is different from the control example of FIG. 25 in that the movable body combined motion effect is executed instead of the movable body motion effect of FIG.

  In the battle reach effect shown in FIG. 26 (A), instead of the movable body action effect by the movable member 321 shown in FIG. 23 (E) in the battle effect as shown in FIG. The movable body uniting effect that operates in the same manner is executed.

  In the story reach effect shown in FIG. 26 (B), instead of the movable body operation effect by the movable member 321 shown in FIG. 24 (E) in the story reach effect as shown in FIG. A movable united effect that operates in a state is executed.

  Also, in the story reach effect shown in FIG. 26 (B), immediately before the end of the second half of the story reach effect that is executed after the message image 54B of “story second half” in FIG. In a specific display area of the display device 9, an operation promotion effect for performing an operation promotion display that promotes the operation of the push button 31 </ b> B such as “press the button” is executed. When the push button 31B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, or when the predetermined period elapses without the operation being performed within the predetermined period, the above-described movable body coalescence is performed. Production is performed.

  In addition, you may perform control which performs a movable body unification effect according to such an operation promotion effect immediately before completion | finish of the battle reach image display in the battle reach effect of FIG. 26 (A). As described above, the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect may be executed at the first video change turning point in the specific super reach effect. Further, the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect may be executed at other video change nodes such as the second video change node in the specific super reach effect. In addition to the push button 31B, for example, other operation means such as a stick controller 31A may be used as the operation means for executing the movable body uniting effect according to the operation of the operation means. Further, not only the operation means but also a movable body combined effect may be executed in response to detection of a specific action of the player by a detection means such as a motion sensor that detects the action of the player. In other words, any production control may be executed as long as the production control performs the movable united production according to the player's action.

  Moreover, the control which performs a movable body unification effect according to such an operation promotion effect does not need to be performed. It is selected whether or not the control for executing the movable united effect according to the operation promotion effect is executed at a predetermined rate by the predetermined lottery process executed by the effect control CPU 120. Sometimes it may be executed.

  In the case of executing the movable body coalescing effect using the unitable movable member as described above, the same effect as in the case of executing the movable body coalescing effect using the movable member 321 described above can be obtained. Furthermore, the fun of the production can be improved by the combined operation.

[Change display such as hold display]
Next, a change effect such as a hold display that can change the display mode of the hold display and the active display will be described. A change effect such as a hold display is executed by the effect control CPU 120. As the change effect such as the hold display, the hold display and the active display are executed based on the hold storage information, and a plurality of timings (for example, during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage information (for example, The first specific display mode in which the type of display to be changed is different from the normal display mode in the case where the change effect such as the hold is executed at any one timing of a plurality of timings during hold display and active display) An example in which the selection ratio of the timing for executing the display mode change is different depending on whether the display mode is the second specific display mode or not.

  In the change effect such as the hold display, when the hold storage information is newly generated, as the hold display and the active display images, the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, and the second specific display mode are selected. An image in any display mode is selected, and the selected image is displayed. For example, as a normal display mode, a general “sphere (circular)” shape display mode, as a first specific display mode, an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as a character icon) using “character”, a second specific mode The display mode is an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as a character icon) using a “character” made up of “human character”.

  In a change display such as a hold display, when a hold storage information is newly generated, as a hold display that appears using a predetermined hold display selection table, an image in a normal display mode, an image in a first specific display mode, Either the second specific display mode image or the image is selected. For example, in the first specific display mode and the second specific display mode, the ratio to be selected when the big hit is set is set higher than when the first specific display mode is lost.

  FIG. 27 shows a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. FIG. 27A shows a character icon selection table, and FIG. 27B shows a character selection table.

  In the change display such as hold display, the image in the normal display mode can select the image color as described above, and the color of the image can be changed by the change display such as hold. As shown in FIG. 27A, in the first specific display mode, the image of the normal display mode can be selected from among a plurality of colors as described above, and by a change effect such as holding. The color of the image can change.

  When the first specific display mode is selected as the hold display to appear, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), after the character icon (caution display) with the characters “caution” displayed on the display at the time of appearance is displayed. The character icon is a character icon (opportunity display) indicating the character “opportunity” as the first change display, or the character icon (fiery heat display) indicating the character “extreme heat” as the second change display. Can be changed. The degree of expectation that the result of the variable display based on the corresponding on-hold storage information becomes the jackpot display result has a relationship of caution display <opportunity display <intense heat display.

  When the second specific display mode is selected as the hold display to appear, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), a character icon (one animal display) showing “one animal character” is displayed in the appearance display. After the character icon is displayed, the character icon (2 animals display) showing “2” animal characters as the first change display, or “3 animals” as the second change display, is displayed. It can be changed to a character icon (3 animals displayed). The degree of expectation that the result of the variable display based on the corresponding on-hold storage information becomes the jackpot display result has a relationship of 1 animal display <2 animal display <3 animal display.

  FIG. 28 shows a display mode change effect execution timing selection process, a display mode change effect type selection process, and a change mode selection process when the hold display is determined to be a display mode of an icon shape such as a character icon or a character icon. It is various data tables used for the icon production | presentation setting process which performs.

  FIG. 28A is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. FIG. 28B is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. In FIGS. 28A and 28B, the random value MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is assigned to two types of display mode change effect timings during hold display and active display.

  In FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode of the hold display is more active than the active display compared to the display mode of the animal character icon. The rate at which change effects are executed is high. On the other hand, when the hold display is the display mode of the animal character icon, the display mode change effect is executed more during the active display than during the hold display compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. The ratio is high. Thereby, attention is paid to the player in the display type (for example, the display type of character icon or animal character icon) to be changed in the display mode change effect and the timing of display mode change (for example, the timing of holding display or active display). It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

  As for the display of the character icon and the display of the animal character icon, as shown in FIGS. 28 (E) to (L) described later, the ratio of the actual change of the display mode after the execution of the display mode change effect is suspended. The display is the same as the active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the ratio of the display mode change effect is higher in the hold display than in the active display compared to the display mode of the animal character icon. When the hold display is the display mode of the animal character icon, the ratio that the display mode change effect is executed during the active display is higher than the hold display compared to when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Based on the high, depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or an animal character icon display, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display. Since they are different, the ratio for selecting whether to change the display mode during holding display or during active display is different. Thereby, about the change of the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the display mode change of the active display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of display to be changed and the timing of the display mode change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to changes in the game.

  FIG. 28C is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined as the character icon display mode. As a kind of change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, the first change effect in which the blue arrow acts on the hold display or the active display and the second change effect on the hold display or the active display. The change effect is provided so as to be selectable by allocating the random value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type.

  FIG. 28D is an animal character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined as the display mode of the animal character icon. As a kind of display mode change effect when the hold display by the animal character icon is executed, the blue arrow acts on the hold display or the active display, and the red arrow acts on the hold display or the active display. The fourth change effect is provided so as to be selectable by allocating the random value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type.

  FIGS. 28E to 28H show the display mode change effect timing and the display mode change effect selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. It is a change selection table used when selecting and deciding a change mode of icon display for each combination with type.

  When it is determined that the first change effect is executed during the hold display, the table in FIG. 28E is used. When it is determined that the first change effect is executed during active display, the table in FIG. 28F is used. When it is determined that the second change effect is executed during the hold display, the table of FIG. 28 (G) is used. When it is determined that the second change effect is executed during active display, the table of FIG. 28 (H) is used. When it is determined that the third change effect is executed during the hold display, the table of FIG. 28I is used. When it is determined that the third change effect is executed during active display, the table of FIG. 28J is used. When it is determined that the fourth change effect is executed during the hold display, the table of FIG. 28 (K) is used. When it is determined that the fourth change effect is executed during active display, the table of FIG. 28 (L) is used.

  In these change selection tables, the change mode selection is made into “no change”, “opportunity” display and “extreme heat” display separately when the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result and when it becomes the loss display result. The random number value MR12 for use is assigned with a different selection ratio.

  28E to 28H, “no change” indicates an aspect in which the character icon does not change, and “opportunity” display indicates an aspect in which the character icon changes to an icon of the character “opportunity”. The “Intense fever” display indicates that the character icon is changed to an icon with a character “Intense fever”.

  In FIGS. 28E to 28H, the change selection random value MR12 is “no change <opportunity + rapid heat (changes)” when the jackpot display result is obtained, and “changes” when the loss display result is obtained. Allocation is based on a selection ratio of “None> Opportunity + Intense fever (changes)”. Also, in FIGS. 28E to 28H, the random value MR12 is selected at a selection ratio of “Opportunity <Intense fever” when the jackpot display result is obtained and “Opportunity> Intense fever” when the display result is lost. Allocated. Thereby, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot display is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, when the character icon changes to “extremely hot”, the expectation that a jackpot display result is higher than when the character icon changes to “opportunity”.

  As for the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, when the display state change of the character icon is selected during active display is lower than during hold display, the result is a jackpot display result. In addition, the ratio of selection of the display mode change in which the level of expectation, which is a big hit, is higher than that in the “opportunity” display is selected during the active display is higher than that during the hold display. Thereby, the player can be made to pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

  28 (I) to 28 (L) show the display mode change effect timing and display selected and determined by the data table of FIGS. 28 (A) and 28 (B) for the display mode change effect of the hold display by the animal character icon. It is a change selection table used when selecting and determining the change mode of icon display according to the combination with the mode change effect type. In these effect selection tables, when the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result and when the display result is the loss display result, the display is changed into “no change”, “2” display, and “3” display. The random number value MR12 for selection is allocated with different selection ratios.

  28 (I) to (L), “no change” indicates an aspect in which the animal character icon does not change, and “two animals” display indicates an aspect in which the animal character icon changes to an icon of “2 animals”. , “3” display indicates that the animal character changes to an icon of “3”.

  In FIGS. 28I to 28L, the random number MR12 is selected at a selection ratio of “2 animals <3 animals” when the jackpot display result is obtained and “2 animals> 3 animals” when the display result is lost. Allocated. Thereby, when the animal character icon changes, the degree of expectation of a jackpot display result is higher than when the animal character icon does not change. Further, when the animal character icon changes to “3”, the degree of expectation that is a jackpot display result is higher than when the animal character icon changes to “2”.

  As for the animal character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 28B and 28C, the ratio of the animal character icon display mode change is lower during active display than during active display. In this case, the ratio of the display mode change in which “3 animals” is displayed, which is higher than the “2 animals” display, is higher than the “2 animals” display, in comparison with the active display. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode change mode of the icon display based on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing for the hold display and the active display.

[Movement of moving body during round]
As described above, when the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a final special symbol in the special figure game, as a result of changing the production symbol, the finalized effect symbol that becomes the normal big hit combination (non-probable variable big hit combination) is stopped and displayed. You may make it happen. Specifically, when a normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special game, the finalized winning symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed at a rate of 100% as a variation display result of the effect symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination at the first ratio (for example, 60%) is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol. Then, it is configured such that a definite effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed at a second ratio (for example, 40%).

  In such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 performs the probability change control after the big hit gaming state ends when the fixed effect symbol that is a normal big hit combination (non-probable variable big hit combination) is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation display result of the effect symbols. An effect suggesting whether or not to be performed is executed in the jackpot display process (S77), the big hit game process (S78), the jackpot end effect process (S79), or the like. In this mode, during the big hit game process (S78), when a predetermined round (for example, the fifth round) is being executed, it is during the round that suggests whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the big hit game state is finished. The suggestion effect shall be executed. This predetermined round is a normal open round in which the upper limit time in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long among the rounds in the big hit game state. .

  In this suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIGS. 30B and 30D, the effect effect in which the flame effect image 1010 or the lightning effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001 and the movable member 321 are operated. As shown in FIGS. 30F to 30H, the character 1060 performs an action of breaking the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061, and as a result, the rock 1062 is broken. Depending on whether or not, the effect configuration is such that a challenge effect for notifying whether or not probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state is executed.

  In the suggestion effect during the round, as shown in FIG. 29, the effect effect and the movable body operation effect are executed in cooperation with one of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2. As an effect effect, as shown in FIG. 30B, a flame effect image 1010 superimposed on a black image 1001 is referred to as a flame effect effect, and as shown in FIG. What superimposes and displays the lightning effect image 1020 is referred to as a lightning effect effect.

  When the big hit type is a probable big hit, that is, when the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it becomes a successful mode in which the probable change control is notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 30 (g)). Then, it is notified that the probability variation control is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. When the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot, that is, when the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, a failure mode in which the probability variation control is not notified in the challenge effect (FIG. 30 (h)). ), It is notified that the probability variation control is not performed (becomes a low probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  The effect pattern A1 executes the first movable body motion effect and also executes the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, without performing the second movable object motion effect and the second effect effect, and the challenge effect. It is an effect pattern to shift to. The production control CPU 120 selects the production pattern A1 at a rate of 2% when the big hit type is a probable variation big hit, and selects the production pattern A1 at a rate of 50% when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit. .

  The effect pattern A2 executes the first movable body operation effect, executes the flame effect effect as the first effect effect, executes the second movable object operation effect, and performs the flame effect effect as the second effect effect. It is an effect pattern that shifts to a challenge effect after execution. The production control CPU 120 selects the production pattern A2 at a rate of 8% when the big hit type is a probable big hit, and selects the production pattern A2 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit. .

  In the production pattern A3, the first movable body operation production is performed, the flame effect production is performed as the first effect production, the second movable body operation production is performed, and the lightning effect production is performed as the second effect production. It is an effect pattern that shifts to a challenge effect after execution. The production control CPU 120 selects the production pattern A3 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is a probable big hit, and selects the production pattern A3 at a rate of 1% when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit. .

  The effect pattern B1 executes the first movable body operation effect and also executes the lightning effect effect as the first effect effect, without executing the second movable object operation effect and the second effect effect, and the challenge effect. It is an effect pattern to shift to. The production control CPU 120 selects the production pattern B1 at a rate of 25% when the big hit type is a probable big hit, and selects the production pattern B1 at a rate of 16% when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit. .

  The production pattern B2 executes the first movable body motion effect, executes the lightning effect production as the first effect production, executes the second movable body motion production, and performs the lightning effect production as the second effect production. It is an effect pattern that shifts to a challenge effect after execution. The production control CPU 120 selects the production pattern B2 at a rate of 40% when the big hit type is a probable big hit, and selects the production pattern B2 at a rate of 8% when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit. .

  When the movable body operation effect and the effect effect are executed in each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in the order of high expectation that the big hit type is a probable big hit, A3, B2, B1, A2 and A1. The degree of expectation here is calculated by, for example, [Proportion for probability variation big hit / (Ratio for probability variation big hit + Ratio for non-probability big hit)] when the production is executed with the production pattern. The effect pattern (A2, A3, B2) in which the movable body action effect and the effect effect are executed twice is expected rather than the effect pattern (A1, B1) in which the moveable object effect effect and the effect effect are executed only once. High degree.

  And when an effect is performed with an effect pattern (A3, B1, or B2) including a lightning effect effect, it is expected more than when an effect is executed with an effect pattern (A1 or A2) that does not include a lightning effect effect. High degree. When the first effect production is a lightning effect production (B1 or B2), the degree of expectation is higher than when the first effect production is a flame effect production (A1, A2, or A3). However, if the first effect production is a flame effect production and the second effect production is a lightning effect production, that is, if it is a production effect, both the first and second effect productions are lightning effects. Expectation is higher than in the case of production.

  Note that there is no so-called down effect pattern in which the first effect effect is a lightning effect effect and the second effect effect is a flame effect effect. By limiting the effects of such decline (prohibiting such effects or making the execution ratio lower than A3), the effect of the effect effects is not reduced.

  Next, an example in which a movable body operation effect and an effect effect are executed with an effect pattern of A1 or A3 will be described using FIG. When the reach result effect described above is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 30A is executed on the effect display device 5, thereby performing a display for confirming the stop symbol of the effect symbol, and a variable display. finish. In this example, when a normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in a special game, a fixed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the production symbol, or in a special game It is assumed that when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol.

  In the example of FIG. 30A, an effect symbol whose symbol number is “4”, which is not a probability variation symbol, is predetermined in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Are stopped on the active line. In addition, a stop symbol effect is performed in which a message image 74 showing the characters “big hit” is displayed below the effect symbol. The production control CPU 120 executes the production according to the execution of each round in accordance with the control to the big hit gaming state. For example, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed, and an image 1000 in which characters “Roundxx” (xx indicates the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state) is displayed on the upper right portion of the screen. To do. Then, a suggestion effect during the round is executed as an effect corresponding to the execution of the fifth round.

  In the first movable body operation effect shown in FIG. 30B, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilted position to the standing position (first standing). The background image of the image 1000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 1001 at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing state), and at the same time, the flame effect image is displayed on the black image 1001. A flame effect effect 1010 is displayed in a superimposed manner.

  When the flame effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is in the standing position, the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image of the image 1000 from the black image 1001 to the normal background image, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the flame effect effect is terminated by deleting the flame effect image 1010. Then, the movable member 321 is moved from the standing position to the tilted position at the timing when the flame effect presentation ends (first tilting).

  When A1 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the challenge effect. On the other hand, when A3 is selected as the effect pattern, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. The control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 again from the tilted position to the standing position (second standing). The background image of the image 1000 is changed from the normal background image to the black image 1001 at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 321 is in the standing state). A lightning effect effect that superimposes 1020 is executed.

  When the lightning effect effect is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is in the standing position, the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image of the image 1000 from the black image 1001 to the normal background image, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the lightning effect image 1020 is deleted to end the lightning effect effect. Then, at the timing when the lightning effect effect ends, the movable member 321 is moved again from the standing position to the tilt position (second tilt). Then, after the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the challenge effect.

  If A2 is selected as the effect pattern, the effect control CPU 120 displays the flame effect image 1010 in a superimposed manner on the black image 1001 in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. The flame effect production is executed again, and the second flame effect production is ended in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 30F, in the challenge effect, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a common effect image regardless of whether the big hit type is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit.

  This effect image includes an image 1050 indicating the characters “challenge time”, a message image 1051 displayed below the characters “promoted when a rock breaks!”, And a character 1060. , A hammer 1061 and a rock 1062. As a result, the player is reminded that “the character 1060 is an effect of trying to break the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061”, and further, “when the rock is broken, the big hit type is a probable big hit regardless of the stop symbol effect. To the player.

  When the big hit type is a probable big hit, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image of a successful mode in which the character 1060 has successfully broken the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061, as shown in FIG. , A message image 1070 on which the characters “probability promotion !!” are displayed. As a result, the player grasps that although the confirmed effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect, the probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. .

  When the big hit type is a non-probable big hit, as shown in FIG. 30 (h), the effect control CPU 120 fails that the character 1060 fails to break the rock 1062 with the hammer 1061 and the hammer 1061 is broken. While displaying the image of a mode, the message image 1080 on which the character "failure!" Was shown is displayed. As a result, the player grasps that the normal jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game, as the fixed bonus symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol effect.

  31A to 31C are timing charts showing the execution timing and execution period of the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when each of the effect patterns A1 to A3 is selected.

  In any case of the effect patterns A1 to A3, when the stop symbol effect is executed in which the effect symbols of the symbol numbers that are not the probability variation symbols are aligned and stopped on the predetermined active line at the timing (1), After the big hit display process (S77) is executed at the timing (2), the process proceeds to the big hit game processing (S78). Further, in the big hit game processing (S78), an effect corresponding to each round is executed, and the above-described in-round suggestion effect is executed as an effect corresponding to the fifth round. When the fifth round is started, a flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (3), and the first tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at timing (4). The flame effect production ends when is performed.

  Thus, in the execution period of the first movable body operation effect, the effect effect of the common mode is executed in any of the effect patterns A1 to A3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp which effect pattern is in the execution period of the first movable body motion effect.

  In the case of the production pattern A1, the second moving body operation production is not performed thereafter, and the challenge production is performed at the timing (7). In the case of the effect pattern A2, the second flame effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilt of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6). When the operation is performed, the second flame effect production ends. And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7). In the case of the production pattern A3, the lightning effect production is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (5), and the second tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6). The lightning effect production ends. And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7).

  In any of the production patterns A1 to A3, in the challenge production, the result is notified at the timing of (8), and it is notified that it becomes a successful mode and becomes a high-accuracy state after the big hit gaming state, Alternatively, a failure state is entered, and a notification is made that a low probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  Thus, when the production pattern A3 is selected, different types of effect production are produced when the first movable body operation effect is executed and when the second movable body operation effect is executed. Since it is configured to be executed, it is possible to diversify the production mode in which the movable body operation production and the effect production cooperate with each other, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, when the production pattern A3 is selected, the degree of expectation, that is, later, compared to the case where the production pattern A1 or A2 in which the flame effect production is executed in the first movable body operation production as in A3 is selected. A high proportion of success is achieved in the executed challenge performance. Therefore, the player decides whether or not the second movable body motion effect is executed, and when the second movable body motion effect is executed, the flame effect effect and the lightning effect effect are accompanied accordingly. Attention will be paid to which one is executed, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the production in which the movable body operation effect and the effect production are linked.

  In addition, the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed has a higher expectation than the effect pattern in which only the flame effect effect is executed. However, as in the effect pattern A3, the flame effect is generated in the first movable body operation effect. Even if the effect is executed, the flame effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect by providing an effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the second movable object operation effect. Even so, it can be expected that the lightning effect production will be executed in the second movable body operation production without discouraging the player. Furthermore, even when compared with the effect pattern in which the lightning effect effect is executed in the first movable body operation effect, the effect pattern A3 has a higher expectation, so that the flame effect effect is produced in the first movable object operation effect. When executed, the player's interest can be sustained.

(Modification 1)
During execution of the effect effect, an operation promotion effect for performing an operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the push button 31B may be executed in a specific display area of the effect display device 9. Then, when the push button 31B is operated by the player within a predetermined period from the start of the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 may change the effect effect mode.

  A specific example is shown in FIG. The description regarding FIGS. 32A to 32C is the same as FIGS. 30A to 30C, and the description is omitted. After the movable member 321 moves to the tilt position (after the first tilt), the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable member 321 from the tilt position to the standing position in the second movable body operation effect shown in FIG. Move again (2nd standing up). Then, at the timing when the movable member 321 reaches the standing position (the timing when the movable member 321 is in the standing state), the background image of the image 1000 is changed to the black image 1001 and simultaneously, the flame effect image 1020 is superimposed on the black image 1001. Run the flame effect effect again.

  When the flame effect presentation is continued for a predetermined period while the movable member 321 is in the standing position, the presentation control CPU 120 pushes the push button 31B on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 as shown in FIG. An operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image made up of an image 1090 that imitates the message 1091 and a message image 1091 showing the characters “Press!” Is superimposed and displayed.

  This operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends) when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses without the push button 31B being operated from the start of display. If the bush button 31B is operated within the period in which the operation promotion image is displayed, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect is ended). When the bush button 31B is operated, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect pattern that can change the effect effect mode in accordance with the player's operation as the effect pattern. ), The effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. On the other hand, when an effect pattern that does not change the effect effect mode according to the player's operation is selected as the effect pattern, an effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 is displayed as shown in FIG. The flame effect image 1010 remains unchanged.

  FIG. 33A shows the execution timing and execution period of the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect when the effect pattern that can change the effect effect mode according to the player's operation is selected. It is a timing chart.

  The description regarding the timings (1) to (4) is the same as that in FIG. When the second raising operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (5), the second flame effect effect is executed. Then, the operation promotion image is displayed at the timing (X) within the second flame effect production period. When the operation promotion image is displayed, the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020 in response to the push button 32B being operated at the timing (Y). Let The lightning effect effect ends when the second tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (6). And it shifts to challenge production at timing (7).

  Thus, by making it possible to change the aspect of the effect effect according to the player's operation, the interest of the effect effect can be further improved. Further, by changing from a flame effect image 1010 having a low expectation level to a lightning effect image 1020 having a high expectation level in accordance with the player's operation, it is possible to make the effect surprising.

  For example, in the above-described effect pattern A2, the operation promotion image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 within the period in which the second flame effect effect is executed. When the push button 31B is operated, the operation promotion image is erased (the operation promotion effect ends), but the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 remains the flame effect image 1010. Production control shall be performed. Thereby, "the effect pattern which does not change the aspect of an effect effect according to a player's operation" may be comprised.

  Further, in the above-described effect pattern A3, when the second movable body operation effect is executed, the flame effect image 1010 is initially superimposed on the black image 1001 instead of the lightning effect image 1020 as the effect effect. The operation promoting image is superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001 and the flame effect image 1010 during the period in which the flame effect image 1010 is displayed. When the push button 31B is operated, the operation promotion image is deleted (the operation promotion effect ends), and the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 changes from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. It is assumed that the production control is performed. Thereby, you may comprise "the effect pattern which changes the aspect of an effect effect according to a player's operation."

  In the example shown in FIG. 33 (A), the display of the already started black image 1001 is continued without ending when the flame effect effect changes to the lightning effect effect according to the operation of the push button 31B. Thus, only the effect image superimposed on the black image 1001 is changed from the flame effect image 1010 to the lightning effect image 1020. That is, if the effect effect is composed of the black image 1001 as the first effect and the effect image as the second effect, only the mode of the second effect is changed without changing the mode of the first effect. This makes it possible to give an impression as if the aspect has changed in accordance with the player's operation during the execution of a series of effects.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described example, the movable body operation effect, the effect effect, and the challenge effect are effects that are executed during the execution of the round, which suggests whether or not the probability change control is performed after the jackpot gaming state ends. Not only in such a form, but also corresponding to each of the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game. As a reach effect to be executed when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a movable body action effect, an effect effect, and a challenge effect are executed, and whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit game state by these effect patterns and effect modes. You may make it suggest.

  The above-described effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are applied as effect patterns of the movable body operation effect and effect effect executed in the reach state. That is, when the movable body operation effect and the effect effect are executed as reach effects in the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, A3, B2, B1, A2, and A1.

  FIG. 33B shows a control example of effect production, movable body production, and challenge production as reach production. Between the start (11) of the variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) and the occurrence of the reach state (12), the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the effect mode of the normal variation display as shown in FIG. Is executed in the effect display device 5.

  When the reach state occurs at the timing (12) in the effect display device 5, the process shifts to the reach effect. In the reach effect, the flame effect effect is executed when the first standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (13), and the flame is performed when the first tilting operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (14). The effect production ends (examples of production patterns A1 to A3).

  In the case of the production pattern A1, after that, the second movable body operation production is not performed, and the process proceeds to the challenge production at the timing (17). In the case of the production pattern A2, the second flame effect production is executed when the second standing motion of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (15), and the second tilt of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (16). When the operation is performed, the second flame effect production ends. And it shifts to a challenge production at timing (17). In the case of the effect pattern A3 illustrated in FIG. 33B, the lightning effect effect is executed when the second standing operation of the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (15), and the movable member 321 is performed at the timing (16). When the second tilting operation is performed, the lightning effect effect ends. And it shifts to a challenge production at timing (17).

  Then, if it is determined that the confirmed effect symbol that is a jackpot combination is to be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol, it becomes a success mode at the timing (18) in the challenge effect, and as a result of the variation display It is notified that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. If it is determined that the fixed effect symbol that is a reach-losing combination is to be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol, the challenge effect may be failed at timing (18) and not controlled to the big hit gaming state. Informed. Thus, the reach result is displayed on the effect display device 5 at the timing (18), thereby informing the reach result. After that, when the reach result effect is completed, a stop symbol effect as shown in FIG. 23 (G) is executed in the effect display device 5 at timing (19), whereby a display for determining the stop symbol of the effect symbol is performed. At the same time, the variable display ends.

(Other variations)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the movable body operation effect related to the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 is an effect of moving the movable member 321 from the tilt position (first position) to the standing position (second position). Although explained, not only in such a form, but the gaming machine has a plurality of movable members, and each movable member is moved by moving each movable member from the corresponding first position to the second position. You may make it the movable body union operation | movement effect by which a specific form (merged form) is comprised by each movable member gathering in the state which exists in each 2nd position is performed. As the movable body operation effect ends, each movable member moves from the corresponding second position to the first position, thereby releasing the specific form (union form). The movable united operation effect will also be described in detail in FIG.

  The movable body operation effect may be an effect in which the shape of the movable member changes, or may be an effect in which a predetermined operation, for example, an operation in a rotation mode, is performed without changing the position of the movable member. For example, a movable body operation effect is an effect that the movable member changes to an expansion / contraction mode, an effect that changes to an open / close mode, an effect that changes to an expansion / contraction mode, It may be an effect that is combined with an accessory that is fixed to the game board surface and does not operate.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the effect linked to the movable body operation effect is the effect effect in which the effect image is superimposed on the black image 1001 in the effect display device 5 is described. The effect in cooperation with the movable body operation effect may be an effect of causing the LED 9 for effect or the light emitting part 321A of the movable member 321 to emit light in a specific manner. For example, in the production patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in place of the “flame effect production”, an “production that causes the production LED 9 or the light emitting unit 321A to emit light in the first emission color (for example, blue)” is executed. Instead of the “effect”, it is preferable to execute “the effect of causing the LED 9 or the light emitting unit 321 </ b> A to emit light in the second emission color (for example, red)”.

  Further, the effect linked with the movable body operation effect may be an effect of outputting a specific sound (specific sound effect or specific music) from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, in the production patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2, in place of the “flame effect production”, an “production that outputs a first specific sound (for example, a low-frequency sound effect)” from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Instead of the “lightning effect effect”, “the effect of outputting the second specific sound (for example, a high-frequency sound effect)” from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, after performing a movable body operation | movement effect and the effect production performed in cooperation with this, a predetermined state (probability change state or jackpot game state) is performed by performing the challenge effect in the effect display apparatus 5. However, the notification effect is not limited to such a form, and the notification effect for notifying whether or not the predetermined state is reached is operated in the previously performed movable body motion effect. It may be an effect of notifying whether or not a predetermined state is obtained depending on whether or not the movable member 321 or a movable member different from this is operated.

  For example, when notifying that a predetermined state (probability change state or big hit game state) is to be made after the effects of the effect patterns A1 to A3 and B1 to B2 are finished, the movable member 321 is moved from the tilt position to the standing position. At the same time, a special image different from the flame effect image 1010 and the lightning effect image 1020 may be superimposed on the black image 1001.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of movable body operation effects are executed as in the production patterns A2, A3, and B2, the first production is performed with the end of the first movable body operation effect. Although an example has been described in which both the black image 1001 and the effect image that is the second effect are erased and once returned to the normal background image, the present invention is not limited to such a form. For example, when the first movable body motion effect is finished, the first effect image is deleted, while the black image 1001 does not continue to return to the normal background image, but the second movable body motion effect. Is executed, the second effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the continuous black image 1001. By adopting such a form, the player expects the second movable body motion effect to be executed because the black image 1001 continues even after the first movable body motion effect is completed. can do.

  Furthermore, in the case of such a form, in the effect pattern (A1 and B1) in which the movable body motion effect is executed only once, the first movable body motion effect is finished and superimposed on the black image 1001. Even after the effect image that has been deleted is deleted, the black image 1001 may be continued for a predetermined period (for example, until the transition to the challenge effect). In this way, the player's interest can be maintained for a predetermined period even after the first movable body operation effect is completed.

  Further, before the first movable body operation effect is executed, when the black image 1001 as the first effect is displayed in advance and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the movable member 321 is in an upright state). In addition, the first effect image may be superimposed and displayed on the black image 1001. Thus, the effect image may be displayed within the display period of the black image 1001 (the second effect is executed within the execution period of the first effect).

  In addition, when the first movable body operation effect is completed, the second movable body operation effect is executed without continuously returning both the black image 1001 and the first effect image to the normal background image. In this case, the effect image superimposed on the continuous black image 1001 may be changed from the first effect image to the second effect image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the period in which the movable member 321 is in the upright state and the period in which the effect image is displayed is the same has been described. The display of the effect image may be started within the movement period in which the movable member 321 moves from the position to the standing position or before the movement period, or within the movement period in which the movable member 321 moves from the standing position to the tilted position. The display of the effect image may end after the period. “Effect production is executed in accordance with the movement of the movable member 321” means “after the movable member 321 starts moving from the tilted position to the standing position, the standing state is reached, and further the movement from the standing position to the tilted position is performed. It is only necessary that at least a part of [period until ending] is overlapped with at least a part of [period during which the effect image is displayed].

  In the above embodiment, it is suggested whether or not the probability variation control is performed after the big hit gaming state by the effect of the mode in which the movable body action effect and the effect effect are linked, or the effect symbol variation display is ended. The display result is derived and displayed, and it is suggested whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and suggests whether or not a special reach effect is executed. It may be a thing that indicates whether or not it is controlled to a big hit gaming state for a variable display (a special figure game that is put on hold) in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied ( It may be a so-called pre-reading notice effect).

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) A movable body effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect display such as the battle reach effect shown in FIGS. 23 and 25A and the story reach effect shown in FIGS. 24 and 25B. Depending on which type of effect display is performed, an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed on a black image and an effect effect display in which an effect image is superimposed on the effect image are displayed. Thus, it is possible to display the effect effect display in a different mode, so that it is possible to enhance the effect effect of linking the operation of the movable body and the effect effect display of the display means.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 23 (E) and FIG. 25 (A), a specific type of effect display such as a battle reach effect in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 321 is executed. When an effect is produced, an effect is produced in which an effect effect display in a specific manner such as the particle effect image 71 of FIGS. 23D and 23E is superimposed on a specific type of effect display such as a display of a victory effect image. Since it is possible, it becomes possible to link the effect display of the specific type in which the movable body effect is executed with the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5, and the movable object by the specific type of effect display can be linked. It is possible to further enhance the production effect in which the operation and the production effect display of the display means are linked.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 24 (E) and FIG. 25 (B), a specific type of effect display such as a story reach effect is executed in which a movable body effect for operating a movable body such as the movable member 321 is executed. 24D, a specific image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 5 such as the black image 72 is displayed as a specific effect effect display such as the flame effect image 73 in FIGS. Since the effect of superimposing and displaying can be executed, it is possible to link a predetermined type of predetermined effect in which the movable body effect is executed and the effect display on the display means such as the effect display device 5. In addition, the entertainment of the game can be improved by emphasizing the movable body effect.

  (4) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable body, as in the initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S51B in FIG. 16, and step S51A in FIG. The running-in operation for moving the movable body is executed like the operation in the running-in running-in process of FIG. For this reason, since the movement of the movable body is not accustomed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable body from operating favorably.

  (5) As shown in [Change effect such as hold display], as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the character icon display has a high change effect execution rate during the hold display, and the animal character icon display is active display. The change production execution ratio is high. Then, as shown in FIGS. 28E to 28L, the rate at which the display mode is actually changed at the time of execution of the change effect is equal between the hold display and the active display. Therefore, depending on whether it is a character icon display or an animal character icon display, the frequency at which the icon display changes between the hold display and the active display is different. Since the ratio of selecting which of the display modes to change is different, the display mode change mode of the icon display is determined from the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing for the hold display and the active display. It is possible to attract more attention to the player, and to improve the interest of the game with respect to changes in the mode of the hold display.

The gaming machine described above also has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine),
A movable object (for example, a movable member 321) movable to a standby position (for example, the first position shown in FIGS. 8 and 9) and an advance position (for example, the second position shown in FIGS. 8 and 9);
When the gaming machine is activated, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object (for example, also referred to as an initial operation or an initial operation in the movable member initialization process in step S51B in FIG. 16), and the movable object Control means (e.g., CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a running-in operation (for example, step S <b> 51 </ b> A in FIG. 16, an operation in the movable member running-in process in FIG. 18, also referred to as a short initial operation).

  According to such a configuration, the confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and the running-in operation for moving the movable object are executed. For this reason, since movement of a movable object is not accustomed, it can suppress affecting the operation | movement of a movable object. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable object from operating well.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object in the break-in operation, an error processing means (for example, step S513, step S517 in FIG. 18) that executes error processing (for example, notification of abnormality) is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, error processing is executed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the break-in operation. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to a state in which the movable object does not operate normally.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The control means executes the break-in operation before the confirmation operation (see, for example, FIG. 16).

  According to such a configuration, the break-in operation is executed before the confirmation operation. As a result, it can suppress that a movable object does not operate | move favorably in confirmation operation | movement.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The control means prohibits the execution of the confirmation operation when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the break-in operation (for example, until the notification stop operation is performed in step S514 and step S518 in FIG. 18). The movable member initialization process in step S51B in FIG. 16 is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the movable object during the break-in operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being performed while the movable object does not operate normally.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation.

  According to such a configuration, the movable object is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation. As a result, the break-in operation can be performed with a suitable power source.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
The movable object is an elastic body (for example, a tension spring 323, which may be another elastic body such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber) during the game, and the elastic body during the running-in operation. A strong motor (for example, the second effect motor 330) is moved to the advanced position as a power source.

  According to such a configuration, a motor having a stronger force than the elastic body is used as a power source for the movable object during the break-in operation. As a result, it is possible to move the movable object to the advanced position more reliably during the break-in operation.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
The movable object includes an electric cable (for example, a cable 361) that bends and stretches as the movable object moves.
The running-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object.

  According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable object and a running-in operation for bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object are performed. For this reason, since the movement of the electric cable is not used, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable object. As a result, it can suppress that a movable object does not operate | move favorably.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above,
The electric cable is provided in the vicinity of an object that generates heat (for example, the LCD of the effect display device 5, the first effect motor 303, and the second effect motor 330).

  According to such a configuration, the electrical cable becomes flexible due to heat. As a result, the movable object can be moved more reliably.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the running-in operation is an operation for bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable object. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the movable object is configured to move along the rail, the movable object is configured to move with a ball screw or a linear guide, and the movable object is a plain bearing. Or a bearing such as a metal bearing or a resin bearing, the operation may be such that the lubricant such as oil or grease moves and becomes accustomed so as to become familiar. In addition, when the movable object has a sliding part such as a rotation or a linear motion, the moving part may be an operation of moving and fixing the sliding part to make it smooth.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation is performed at startup. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation may be performed periodically during a demonstration in which a game after starting is not performed. Even if it does in this way, it can control that a movable object does not operate | move favorably during a game.

  (11) The cable 361 according to the above-described embodiment supplies power to the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power or control signals are supplied to other electrical components (for example, actuators such as motors and solenoids that move movable objects and display devices such as LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that displays images). It may be.

  (12) The cable 361 may be a flexible flat cable, a flat cable in which a plurality of coated wires are arranged and fused, a single wire or a stranded wire, or a twisted wire. It may be a paired line.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the break-in operation and the confirmation operation are performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation and the confirmation operation may be executed as a series of operations.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the initial position of the movable object is detected in the confirmation operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial position of the movable object may be detected in the break-in operation. In addition to the break-in operation and the confirmation operation, the initial position of the movable object may be detected.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of gaming balls circulate inside the gaming machine. The number of loaned balls that are enclosed in a possible manner and loaned in response to a player's loan request, or the number of prize balls given in response to winnings, is added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. The present invention is also applicable to so-called enclosed game machines. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value. It can also be applied to slot machines.

  In the embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol that is the variation display result, and then display the final stop symbol. It is designed to stop display, but it is not limited to this, and after a variable display of multiple types of special symbols without including the final stop symbol that results in variable display, the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be. That is, the final stop symbol that is the variation display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for variation display.

  It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition, as a gaming machine of the present invention,
A movable body (movable member 321) capable of a first operation (a standing operation that is a movement from a tilting position to a standing position) and a second operation (a tilting operation that is a movement from a standing position to a tilting position);
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects (process during effect symbol variation (S75), big hit game process (S78), etc.);
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means for outputting specific signals (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication system from the control means. For example, a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state),
The effect execution means is a first pattern for executing a special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (a flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and a second movable body motion effect is Production pattern A1 which is not executed and flame effect production is executed at the time of the first movable body motion production and flame effect production is executed at the time of the second movable body motion production. With this, after executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern (first time) that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. A game characterized in that an effect can be executed with a production pattern A3) in which a flame effect production is executed at the time of the movable body movement production and a lightning effect production is carried out at the second movement operation of the movable body. And the like.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, a movable body capable of further performing a first operation (a standing operation that is a movement from the tilting position to the standing position) and a second operation (a tilting operation that is a movement from the standing position to the tilting position). (Movable member 321);
Effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects (process during effect symbol variation (S75), big hit game process (S78), etc.);
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means is the first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, the normal slew rate output state (refer to FIG. 47 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises with a modest change than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 47 (2))). (For example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 46). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Set to the normal slew rate output state),
The effect execution means is a first pattern for executing a special effect of the first mode in accordance with the first motion of the movable body (a flame effect effect is executed at the time of the first movable body motion effect, and a second movable body motion effect is Production pattern A1 which is not executed and flame effect production is executed at the time of the first movable body motion production and flame effect production is executed at the time of the second movable body motion production. With this, after executing the special effect of the first mode, the second pattern (first time) that executes the special effect of the second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. A game characterized in that an effect can be executed with a production pattern A3) in which a flame effect production is executed at the time of the movable body movement production and a lightning effect production is carried out at the second movement operation of the movable body. And the like.

  According to these gaming machines, the aspect of the special effect accompanying the first operation of the movable body is made different, so that the effects of diversification can be improved and the interest about the effect when the movable body operates can be improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. In addition, if an unintended performance occurs due to noise during the game, the player may feel discomfort or distrust. Can be suppressed. This leads to the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, with respect to effects involving movement of the movable body (for example, effects of the first pattern and effects of the second pattern, etc.), the player's expectation is drawn or the player's attention is attracted by changes in the effect mode. Since it is possible to highly suppress the occurrence of an unintended operation due to such an effect accompanied by the operation of the movable body, it is possible to obtain an effect that the interest about the effect when the movable body operates can be improved.

Furthermore, the following gaming machines (a) and (b) can be cited as examples of gaming machines that can increase the noise tolerance of control signals for preventing malfunctions.
(A) Electric parts (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054 ) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. A gaming machine characterized by being set to a slew rate output state).
(B) Electric components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054 ) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). And a normal slew rate output state).
Hereinafter, examples of these gaming machines will be described as other examples.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, other exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In FIG. 34, an effect movable mechanism 9050 described later is indicated by a broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 34, the lower right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, a main image display device 905MA is provided. The main image display device 905MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. Thus, for example, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be individually identified are variably displayed in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R arranged in the display area of the main image display device 905MA, the decorative symbols corresponding to each are variably displayed. In this case, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right”, variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols can be changed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronism with the special game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as “temporary stop display”, and although the display result in the variable display has not been displayed deterministically, the player has confirmed that the variation of the decorative pattern due to scroll display or update display has not progressed. It becomes possible to recognize. The temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, etc., and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed for a period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals) Or a combination of English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, numbers, letters or symbols and character images, and character images are, for example, people, animals, other objects, or It may be configured to include a symbol such as a character or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed.

  Note that the decorative symbols are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and corresponding to the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game, the image display device 905 (main image display device 905MA or a sub image described later). Any effect image can be displayed on the screen of the display device 905 SU or the like. For example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, a battle effect in which a special symbol variable display character fights may be performed by displaying an effect image having a story. Then, it may be possible to execute such an effect that the variable display result displays the result of the story corresponding to the “lost” result. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, in the case of a professional wrestling or soccer game or an enemy friend, an effect of defeating the game or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, an effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the display color change display and the stop display in a specific display region are repeated. And when the variable display result is “losing”, by maintaining the state where the predetermined display color (for example, white) is stopped and displayed, or by maintaining the predetermined display color in a non-display state, Derived and displayed decorative symbols. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative design is derived and displayed by maintaining the state where the display is stopped with a display color (for example, red) different from the predetermined display color. In this way, during the variable display of decorative symbols, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols may be maintained in a non-display state. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display) as the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined design may be repeated so that other effect images are not displayed. As a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect image indicating the predetermined symbol used for variable display is not stopped and displayed, and the effect image indicating a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By displaying, a decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Occurs based on starting prizes by entering. In other words, a start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1 Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B (second start condition) ) Is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is 1 Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories identifiable on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  On the right side of the main image display device 905MA, a sub image display device 905SU that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 905MA. The installation location of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 902. For example, the main image display device 905MA is installed near the center of the game area, The sub image display device 905SU may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as outside the gaming area, the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 903, the lower front portion, or the front side.

  Below the main image display device 905MA, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not pass (enter) through the second starting winning port when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. As a big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the special winning opening door solenoid 9028 is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the grand prize winning opening, and the game ball passes through the big winning prize entrance (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the game balls detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol hold indicator 9025C for displaying the number of general symbols reserved as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 902 may be provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a number of obstacle nails, and a single or a plurality of general winning holes. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  The game board 902 is provided with an effect moving mechanism 9050 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect by lighting the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment. The effect movable mechanism 9050 has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect movable mechanism 9050 changes between a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are positioned separately on the upper and lower screens of the main image display device 905MA and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are positioned in front of the screen of the main image display device 905MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right and front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect movable mechanism 9050 shown in FIG. 36 is for the retreat state. In this embodiment, a game area of the game board 902 is constituted by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 9050 is arranged behind the transparent plate, and the game ball is shown as an effect. It flows down in front of the movable mechanism 9050. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 9050 may be disposed in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

  FIG. 35 shows a case where a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state located in front of the main image display device 905MA. FIG. 36 shows an operation example of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The effect movable mechanism 9050 includes an upper mechanism including two movable members 9051 and 9052 positioned on the upper screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state, and 2 positioned on the lower screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism having two movable members 9053 and 9054. That is, the effect movable mechanism 9050 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from or in close proximity to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state as the first state is established. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advancing state as the second state is obtained. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are provided with drive means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. The movable members 9051 and 9052 are configured such that their left ends are pivotally supported by a decoration member 9057 and are rotatable with respect to the decoration member 9057. The decoration member 9057 moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 9051 when the power from the operation motor 9060A is output to the movable member 9051.

  The movable member 9051 includes a front surface portion and a base body disposed behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 9052 receives power from the operation motor 9060B and rotates upward or downward with respect to the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B only needs to be attached to the front surface of the base body included in the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B provides a driving force for driving the movable member 9052 to be operable. The movable members 9053 and 9054 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and the power from the operation motor 9060C is transmitted through a power transmission unit or the like engaged with the link mechanism. Can pivot to the center.

  A movable member position sensor 9061 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The movable member position sensor 9061 may be any sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As an example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, and the like. From the operation states of the corresponding operation motors 9060A to 9060C, for example, the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration member 9057 Any member that can detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be used. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A. A position detection signal that can specify the operation positions of the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 is output. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation about the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, thereby moving the movable member relative to the movable member 9051. A position detection signal capable of specifying the relative operation position 9052 and the like is output. The third position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, so that the movable members 9053 and 9054 can move. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation position is output.

  As another example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 9057, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. What is necessary is just to be comprised using. Accordingly, the first to fifth position sensors may detect the operation state of the corresponding movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 and output a position detection signal according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members, respectively.

  In each of the movable members 9051 and 9052, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). A plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9051 constitute a light emitter unit 9071 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9052 constitute a light emitter unit 9072 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As described above, the movable members 9051 and 9052 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used as each light emitter. As a result, the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 emit light from the light emitting unit 9071 such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color and displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. The display effect by the lighting mode of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9072 can be executed. In this way, the light emitter unit 9073 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time and execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged by the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 included in the movable members 9051 and 9052, partition bodies formed in a lattice shape are provided so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9051 and 9052 is provided on the front surface of the partition body of the movable members 9051 and 9052.

  Like the movable members 9051 and 9052, the movable members 9053 and 9054 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, in each of the movable members 9053 and 9054, a plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9053 constitute a light emitter unit 9073 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9054 constitute a light emitter unit 9074 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used as each light emitter. As a result, the movable member 9053 and the movable member 9054 emit light from the light emitter unit 9073, such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color, as well as displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. It is possible to execute a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9074. In this way, the light emitter unit 9073 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time and execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 included in the movable members 9053 and 9054, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9053 and 9054 is provided on the front surface of the partition body of the movable members 9053 and 9054.

  Note that the plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using full-color LEDs, and for example, single-color or multi-color LEDs may be used, or light emitters other than LEDs may be used. The partition may be configured by a member that is three-dimensionally formed in a lattice shape, or may be configured, for example, by forming a lattice-shaped pattern on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. . The partition is not limited to one configured to partition a plurality of light emitters one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of light emitters by a predetermined number, or may be configured in a predetermined direction (for example, lateral direction And the vertical direction). Furthermore, such a partition may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 36A, in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated from each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. Don't be. At this time, each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is located above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9052 is located behind the movable member 9051, so that the player cannot see or difficult to see the movable member 9052. It becomes. In addition, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054, so that the player cannot visually recognize or difficult to see the movable member 9053. Become. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes visible.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (B), in the advanced state where the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. . When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 9052 moves downward from the back side of the movable member 9051 with rotation, and the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with rotation. To do. In addition, the movable member 9051 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 9052, and the movable member 9054 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 9053. Thus, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes difficult or impossible to see.

  When the upper and lower mechanisms of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. 36A, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054 are the same. do not do. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively. Match. As described above, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the movable members 9051 are aligned by aligning the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively. ˜9054 can give a sense of unity to the display effect. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, by performing an integral display effect with the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, the interest of the effect can be improved. Moreover, since the visibility with respect to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the production.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c are provided at the periphery of the gaming area. Is provided. Each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, a frame member arranged at the peripheral edge of the main image display device 905MA, etc.) A decorative LED may be disposed around the periphery. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B. Note that, when an operation by a player is detected, the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B are changed in the display effect on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU by the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. Effects such as operation in the movable mechanism 9050, sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and lighting operations (flashing operations) in light emitters such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c (for example, a notice effect or a reach effect) It may be used in such as. Instead of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, or in addition to the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, a sensor or the like for detecting the operation of the player may be provided. For example, it may have a configuration for directly detecting the player's movement, such as a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, A configuration may be provided that indirectly (remotely) detects the player's operation, such as a CMOS sensor. An arbitrary action may be detected by analyzing a result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In other words, any configuration that can detect the operation of an arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be provided.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, and an audio output board 9013 as shown in FIG. 37 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, a drive control board 9016B and light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting control and light-off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and performs the first special diagram and the second special symbol display. It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of a special figure. For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory and a solenoid 9028 for a special prize opening door.

  As shown in FIG. 37, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example.

  The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub-side independent of the main board 9011. Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display are displayed. Device 905SU, luminous body units 9071 to 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable members 9051 to 9054 and decoration members 9057 connected to operation motors 9060A to 9060C, and other effects Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by various electrical components for rendering such as a device are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays images on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, lights on a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, Lighting motors 9060A to 9060C for moving lighting members, movable members 9051 to 9054, and decorative members 9057 that are different from the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the light emitting members constituting the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LEDs. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a driving operation of On the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 37, an effect control microcomputer 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are mounted.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the audio output board 9013 are transmitted. Wiring etc. are connected. In addition, wiring for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D is also connected via the effect control relay board 9016A. The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 9016B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 by driving the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. . The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for turning on the light emitters 9071 to 9074.

  The light emitter control board 9016D is mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is provided as a left frame LED 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters. The light emitter control board 9016E is mounted above the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is provided as a top frame LED 909a above the gaming machine frame 903. What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting a several light-emitting body. The light emitter control board 9016F is mounted on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903 as a right frame LED 909c. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is only the effect control relay board 9016A from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. To be transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 via the light emitter control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. The Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is sent from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. To be transmitted.

  Further, from the drive control board 9016B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating a result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061 is provided through the effect control relay board 9016A. Is transmitted to. Further, as an information signal indicating that a player's operation act on the push button 9031B has been detected, a wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012.

  The audio output board 9013 is an audio output board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R serving as sound output devices in accordance with the audio signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed.

  The effect control relay board 9016A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D. Relay various signals. The back pack is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the main image display device 905MA may be formed at the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the audio output board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 9012 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 9016B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The drive control board 9016B rotates the movable members 9051 to 9054 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A driver IC for performing control and movement control of the decorative member 9057 is mounted. An output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. If the drive control board 9016B includes wiring for transmitting the position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 9061 to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. Good. The light emitter control board 9016C is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits for driving the light emitter for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters are mounted.

  The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 903 and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012, etc. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are mounted.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and a sound used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Control command, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, decorative LED, light emitter control command used to control lighting operations of a plurality of light emitters constituting light emitter units 9071 to 9074, etc. A movable mechanism control command used for controlling the operation of the mechanism 9050 and the like is included.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided. Note that the random number circuit 90104 is not limited to that incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 38 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. On the effect control board 9012, for example, an effect control microcomputer 90120, ROM 90121, RAM 90122, effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like are mounted. The ROM 90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be partly or entirely built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of the ROM 90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be external to the effect control microcomputer 90120. It may be attached. The presentation control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 38 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 90130, a work memory 90131, a host interface 90132, a DRAM interface 90133, and a data memory interface 90134. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, a VRAM (Video RAM) 90141, a display output system interface 90142, an audio processing circuit 90143, an audio interface 90144, and a general-purpose output controller 90145. It has. Note that the VDP 90140 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The VDP 90140, the VRAM 90141, the display output system interface 90142, the audio processing circuit 90143, the audio interface 90144, and the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be partly or wholly built in the production control microcomputer 90120, or a part thereof. Alternatively, all may be configured as an external circuit of the production control microcomputer 90120.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes control processing according to the effect control program. The ROM 90121 stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like that are read for the CPU 90130 to execute control processing. The RAM 90122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 is provided to execute various processes by the CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140. The ROM 90121 stores various data tables used for controlling the rendering operation, in addition to the rendering control program. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is composed of process data including The RAM 90122 stores various data used for controlling the rendering operation.

  The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C store fixed data for executing effects. Among the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B have storage areas for storing in advance various image data (image element data) indicating display images in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. What is necessary is just to be provided. In the effect data memory 90123C, various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stored in advance, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A storage area or the like for storing in advance various light emission data indicating the lighting control content may be provided. Note that the light emission data indicating the lighting control content of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be generated using image data. The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be non-rewritable semiconductor memories, for example, may be rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memories such as NAND-ROMs, or are non-volatile such as magnetic memories and optical memories. Any recording medium may be used.

  Data for creating lighting data (light emission data) of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Separately from the image data of the effect image, it is stored in advance in one of the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. It may be stored in advance in either of these. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 may be effect data memories 90123A to 90123A as image data or light emission data separate from the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU. When the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the drawing process, display data that is stored in advance in any of the 90123C displays the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. It may be added to the data.

  FIG. 39 shows a setting example of addresses and stored contents in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. FIG. 39A shows an example of setting the contents stored in the ROM 90121. The ROM 90121 is assigned consecutive addresses from the address MA00 as the leading address to the address MA10 as the final address. FIG. 39 (B1) shows a setting example of the stored contents in the effect data memory 90123A. In the effect data memory 90123A, an address MA10 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the ROM 90121 is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA20 that is the final address is given. FIG. 39 (B2) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123B. In the effect data memory 90123B, an address MA20 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 90123A is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA30 that is the final address is given. FIG. 39 (B3) shows a setting example of the stored contents in the effect data memory 90123C. In the effect data memory 90123C, an address MA30 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 90123B is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA40 that is the final address is given. In this way, consecutive addresses are assigned to the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 90121 is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A.

  In ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, programs and data used for execution of effects by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting a program module). The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and reserves other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the entire ROM 90121 has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1.5 gigabits or 2 gigabits. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. Table data of various tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 90121 as management data. That's fine. The ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A store audio data used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memories 90123A and 90123B store image data used for controlling the display of effect images on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and further, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame. Image data used for lighting control of a light emitter such as the LED 909c and a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be stored.

  The ROM 90121 is provided with a storage area for storing sound data, and at least the sound data is stored. Accordingly, the ROM 90121 provides a first area for storing audio data as first control data used for audio control for outputting audio from at least the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 90123A is a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A second area is provided for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in the.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 90121 but also in the effect data memory 90123A. The storage area for storing audio data in the ROM 90121 is allocated from the address MA02 shown in FIG. 39A to the address MA10 that is the final address in the ROM 90121. As shown in FIG. 39 (B1), the storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 90123A is allocated from the address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11, which is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A. As described above, the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area stores the audio data in the continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. An area is allocated. In the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area, audio data as first control data is stored in a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is stored not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area, but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. It is also stored in a storage area to which consecutive addresses from address MA10 + 1 to address MA11, which are the next addresses of address MA10, are assigned.

  The effect data memory 90123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. On the other hand, because it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the amount of control information to be stored in the ROM 90121 or the like for controlling the effects by various effect devices increases, and the storage capacity becomes insufficient. There is a case. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 increases. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reduced by providing a storage area for data used for control different from the image data in the effect data memory 90123A. When providing an audio data storage area, a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the last address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 90121 is allocated to the effect data memory 90123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 90121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 90123A, it is read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. Thus, the audio data can be appropriately read out.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 38 executes a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts in accordance with the effect control program read from the ROM 90121. At this time, the CPU 90130 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the host interface 90132, the CPU 90130 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and temporarily stores them. The CPU 90130 reads out various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and the CPU 90130 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 such as the main board 9011 through the host interface 90132 or the like. Receiving operation for accepting input, the CPU 90130 uses the host interface 90132 and other various circuits for effect control micro Such transmission operation to the outside of the computer 90 120 outputs various signals is also performed. In addition, the CPU 90130 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the data memory interface 90134, and read stored data.

  The VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed rendering function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example. The image processor executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from the CPU 90130. The VDP 90140 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134, and read image data.

  The VRAM 90141 provides a work area for temporarily storing the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, or a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing processing by the VDP 90140 is expanded and stored. Or provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 90141 is allocated with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, and a CG buffer, for example. Good. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the rendering process by the VDP 90140 is executed, or temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the rendering process. It is used to Display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 90141 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 90140 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons, for example. The VRAM 90141 stores, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. A virtual display area to be stored may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 90141, and the display data of the virtual display area read out by the VDP 90140 is displayed and output. You may output from the system | strain interface 90142 to the main image display apparatus 905MA side.

  An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 90141. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is stored. In the image drawing area, display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank is generated. The V blank is generated at a cycle in which an image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130.

  By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period). In the next V blank period (second drawing display period), the storage area is switched to the image display area. Accordingly, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 90142 to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in the second drawing display period. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is assigned in the second drawing display period, display data created by the drawing process is stored.

  In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer may be allocated to each storage area to which an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 accesses system registers and attribute registers built in the VDP 90140. Various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register in accordance with process data such as display control data included in the effect control pattern. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 90120, the CPU 90130 indirectly controls the display operations in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU.

  The process data indicates the setting contents that the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 performs on the system register and attribute register of the VDP 90140 every time V blank occurs. The setting contents of the system register include drawing and data transfer commands, CG data to be transferred, palette data, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register only need to indicate an attribute as a parameter used for rendering processing of the effect image. In the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated each time a V blank is generated.

  The display output system interface 90142 outputs a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the main image display device 905MA. To output various images on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The display output system interface 90142 displays a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) as a sub-image display. Various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU by outputting it to the device 905SU.

  The audio processing circuit 90143 is a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The audio processing circuit 90143 accesses the ROM 90121 via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the host interface 90132, or effects data memories 90123A to 90123A through the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the data memory interface 90134. The voice data can be read out by accessing 90123C. The audio processing circuit 90143 may directly access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, the audio processing circuit 90143 is read from the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by the access by the CPU 90130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of audio data. The audio processing circuit 90143 generates an audio signal (sound effect signal) using the audio data. The audio signal (sound effect signal) generated by the audio processing circuit 90143 is output toward the audio output board 9013 via the audio interface 90144.

  The general-purpose output controller 90145 has various effects such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and light emitter units 9071 to 9074 and drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C. It is a control circuit for performing operation control in the apparatus. The general-purpose output controller 90145 can read motor data and light emission data by accessing the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134. The general-purpose output controller 90145 may directly access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, motor data or light emission read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of data. The general-purpose output controller 90145 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C or the display data supplied from the VDP 90140 as serial signal data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

  FIG. 40 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Various circuits for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C. A light emitter control board 9016C shown in FIG. 40 includes a buffer memory 90151, a lighting data generation circuit 90152, a serial output circuit 90153, and a light emitter driver 90154.

  The buffer memory 90151 temporarily stores data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 may be data corresponding to the display data generated by the VDP 90140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 reads the data stored in the buffer memory 90151 and executes predetermined conversion processing, thereby generating lighting data constituting the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data serving as drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the luminance (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include gradation data serving as tone control information.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides a region where a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitters for each of the blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are set in advance as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 90153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

  FIG. 41 shows a setting example in which a region where a plurality of light emitters in the movable member 9051 are arranged and arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. The regions where the plurality of light emitters are arranged on the movable member 9051 are light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 41A and light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. Divided. Similarly to the movable member 9051, the movable members 9052 to 9054 other than the movable member 9051 are set so as to divide the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. As a result, the entirety of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 provided in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Note that the number of divisions of the light emitter block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050, the size of the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged, and the like. .

  Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, depending on the shape of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like, the area where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 cannot be accommodated in the square light emitter block, and one light emission There may be a surplus area where light emitters less than the body block are arranged. In addition, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, there may be an empty area where the light emitter is not disposed in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including a surplus area where light emitters less than one light emitter block are arranged in an empty area in any one of the light emitter blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of light emitters is reduced.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the light emitter driving unit 90154 by a serial signal method. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. The serial output circuit 90153 has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring) such as 21 systems as a serial output system for outputting a control signal. The serial output circuit 90153 is connected to serial signal wirings corresponding to each of the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21, and outputs a control signal including lighting control information to each wiring by a serial signal system. As described above, the serial output circuit 90153 outputs the control signal including the lighting control information to the serial signal wirings of a plurality of systems by the serial signal method.

  FIG. 42 shows a connection setting example between the serial output system and the light emitter block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 42, the connection is made so that two light emitter blocks among the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are assigned to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via a serial signal wiring. The serial output system K02 is connected to a light emitter block B03 and a light emitter driver for controlling the light emitter block B04 through serial signal wiring. Also in the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that perform lighting control of light emitters included in a light emitter block assigned to one serial output system may be connected by a serial bus system via serial signal wiring. In addition, it is not limited to what is connected by a serial bus system, A some light emitter driver may be connected in series (connected by a daisy chain system).

  The light emitter driving unit 90154 shown in FIG. 40 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitter drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitters included in the regions divided into the light emitter blocks B01 to B42. . Each driver IC performs lighting control of a plurality of light emitters based on lighting control information indicated by a control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 90153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of a parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers has a strobe side driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of the light emitter in accordance with the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal, and gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Accordingly, the driver IC is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs serving as a gradation control circuit that performs gradation control of the light emitter. In each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block using a strobe side driver IC and a digit side driver IC. As shown in FIG. 40, in the light emitter control board 9016C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C. By doing so, it is configured so as to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

  FIG. 43 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11 as a specific example. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 43, as a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11, a strobe-side light emitter driver 90411S, a digit upper-side light emitter driver 90411DU, and a digit lower-side light emitter driver 90411DD. Is provided. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 42 includes the strobe side light emitter driver 90411S, the digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD corresponding to the light emitter block B11 from the serial output circuit 90153. And then connected to the light emitter driver provided corresponding to the light emitter block B12.

  Different address information is assigned to each of the light emitter driver 90411S, the light emitter driver 90411DU, and the light emitter driver 90411DD. The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal indicating the lighting control information to which the address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11 is output. Transmit the lighting control information.

  The serial signal wiring may include a serial clock wiring for transmitting the serial clock SC and a serial data wiring for transmitting serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and performs lighting control of the plurality of light emitters.

  The light emitter block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD. It is comprised with the combination with half block B11D comprised from these. Thus, each light emitter block only needs to be configured by a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the light emitter block. Note that the plurality of light emitter blocks is not limited to a combination of two half blocks. For example, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, a light emitter block constituted by only one half block may be included in addition to a light emitter block constituted by combining two half blocks. When the light emitter block B11 is configured with only one half block, the light emitter driver 90411S on the strobe side and the light emitter driver 90411DU on the upper digit side are provided, but the light emitter driver 90411DD on the lower digit side is not provided. What is necessary is just composition. In this way, each light emitter block may be configured to include one strobe side light emitter driver and one or two digit side light emitter drivers.

  Half block B11U and half block B11D should just be comprised so that the number of light-emitting bodies may become the same number, respectively. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver 90411S is connected to 12 strobe signal lines and outputs a strobe signal as a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 columns. The digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD are each connected to eight digit signal lines, and gradation data for gradation control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight rows. The digit signal that becomes the signal is output. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the digit upper side and the half block B11D corresponding to the digit lower side are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters composed of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. Yes. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the light emitter blocks other than the light emitter block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters. Thus, the half blocks as modules constituting the light emitter block only need to be configured so that the same number of light emitters can be controlled to be turned on.

  Note that the number of light emitters included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be an arbitrary number determined in advance based on the specification and design of the light emitter driver. For example, when eight strobe signal lines are configured to drive and control a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns, a total of 64 light emitters comprising eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are provided. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be contained in one half block. Further, the number of light emitters that can be controlled to be lighted by one half block and the number of light emitters actually included in one half block do not always have to coincide with each other. For example, while the number of light emitters that can be controlled to light in one half block is 96, the number of light emitters actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of the light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. There may be fewer than 96. In this way, it is only necessary to control the lighting of a predetermined number of light emitters or less for each half block as a module smaller than a plurality of blocks obtained by dividing a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for performing dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data serving as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitters, control data for time-sharing driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Also, gradation data serving as gradation control information for designating luminance (gradation) for each emission color is generated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control corresponding to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line. The light emitter driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that performs gradation control of the light emitter according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals output within a certain period ( What is necessary is just to perform gradation control of the light emitter according to the physical quantity (pulse quantity) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system to which the light emitter block to be controlled for lighting is connected in the serial signal system. A strobe-side light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The light emitter driver at the upper or lower digit provided for each light emitter block outputs a digit signal based on the grayscale data, so that multiple light emitters connected to the digit signal line can be grayscaled. Control. Thus, in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the plurality of light emitters arranged in a row emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period in which the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks For each of B01 to B42, the lighting mode can be changed by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). As described above, by configuring the dynamic lighting control for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, the light emitter driving unit 90154 can perform lighting control using a plurality of light emitter drivers in parallel. .

  FIG. 44 (1) shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 44 (1), a motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. The motor drive driver 90412 receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. The motor drive driver 90412 performs drive control of the operation motors 9060A, 9060B, and 9060C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is also input to the drive control board 9016B and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44 (2) shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 44 (2), a light emitter driver 90413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016D. The luminous body driver 90413b receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the light emitter driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 44 (2), the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (2), a light emitter driver 90413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016E. In the illuminant driver 90413a, a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 passes through the effect control relay board 9016A and further passes through the light emitter control board 9016D in a serial signal format. Entered. The light emitter driver 90413a performs lighting control of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (2), a light emitter driver 90413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016F. The light emitter driver 90413c receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A, and further via the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E. Are input in a serial signal format. The light emitter driver 90413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 909c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (2), in the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are sent to different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively. By being sequentially transmitted between the mounted light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are respectively transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the gaming machine frame 903 is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively. A plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as top frame LEDs 909a above the frame 903, and a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as left frame LEDs 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as right frame LEDs 909 c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903.

  In this embodiment, a light emitter driver (for example, light emitter drivers 90411S, 90411DU, and 90411DD shown in FIG. 45) for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the motor drive driver 90412, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuits. (Integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 45 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

  Note that serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c convert an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and one that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals are different. 45 and 46, the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described as a representative example, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the light emitter driver 90411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel converter circuit, and the motor driver 909042 and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel converter circuit. The

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the serial-parallel conversion circuit receives the clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 9016E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (2), the light emitter driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 16D receives a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. Is output to the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E, and the clock signal and data are emitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the body driver 90413a. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E is input via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control board 9016D. The control signal (clock signal and data) is output to the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F. The CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit for realizing the light emitter driver 90413a. The clock signal and the data are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 90413c.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the other part of the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other data input from the DATA / I terminal is input to the decoder and converted from the serial signal format to 24 channels. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 for a 12-channel circuit) for inputting decode addresses. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. Data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into a signal of a parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. In the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since six terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 47 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and is set to a normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the clock signal and The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  In general, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set it to the low slew rate output shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the rising and falling slopes of the waveform are larger, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the production control microcomputer 90120 and the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When there is a large transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output signal is in a state closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  A T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function for signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the time-out reset function is enabled, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the production control microcomputer 90120. It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second).

  A Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sync output.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of a common format shown in FIG. 48 (1) and a basic format shown in FIG. 48 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 48 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 45 and 46), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including LED gradation control is performed. It can be carried out.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 48 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 48 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 48 (3), the extended format includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case of controlling driving of an operation motor using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control or the like is not necessary unlike lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED. It is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

  48, the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, for example, the common control data format shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 48 (2) is different in that the basic format is shorter because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 48 (3) is different in that the extended format is short because it includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured so that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, a 6 MHz clock signal is output from the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 49, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is converted to a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of four channels. As shown in FIG. 49, the signal output timing is the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1), but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  49, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is converted to 1 MHz. The signals are separated into three-phase clock signals, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  Next, connection examples in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49 is used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c will be described. 50 to 52 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among these, FIG. 50 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. FIG. 51 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. FIG. 52 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c.

  First, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 50 is an example, and since the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 include a plurality of light emitter drivers, different decode addresses are set for each light emitter driver.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, all the light emitter drivers 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the illuminant drivers is performed on the same illuminant control board 9016C (transmission across the board is not performed), it is not necessary to worry about the resistance to noise. In view of this, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. In the example shown in FIG. 50, for the sake of convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, it is used for RGB. You may comprise so that three terminals may be connected to one color LED, and if a single color LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one single color LED. . Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the driving of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 000111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 51 is an example, and other values may be set as the decode address.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the power supply voltage VCC (5V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first operation motor 9060A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 9060B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operation motor 9060C.

  As already described, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timings of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are distributed by being grouped into three groups of groups 1-3. If the output timing differs between signals output to the same operating motor, the driving accuracy of the operating motor may not be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, so that the drive accuracy of the operation motor is as described above. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  Conversely, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 described in FIG. 50, or when connecting to the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame LED 909c of FIG. In the case of connecting to the light source, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, there is no such trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD3 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 001111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 52 is an example, and there are three light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. Therefore, different decode addresses are set for the respective light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are different light emitter control boards 9016D. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on ˜9016F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the serial-parallel conversion circuit uses a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC). The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are connected to a plurality of light emitters as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 52, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  As shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a plurality of light emitters, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, which constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in effect control process processing (see step S9065) described later. A control signal for controlling lighting of the right frame LED 909c is output, or a control signal for controlling driving of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is output. However, since the timeout function is set to an effective state. When the control signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, the later-described production control process (see step S9065). Accordingly, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continued. It is controlled to be executed.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, the light emitter driver every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals 90413a to 90413c is automatically stopped, for example, after the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stopped. In spite of the control, it is possible to prevent the operation motors 9060A to 9060C from being stopped due to a signal loss or malfunction, and the operation motors 9060A to 9060C being burned. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the time-out function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, while setting the time-out function to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the operation motor, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Unlike the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, there is no problem such as burn-in with respect to the light emitters such as the frame LED 909c. Also good.

  In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute lighting control and drive control, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 90120 (may be provided on the effect control board 9012 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A), When the production control microcomputer 90120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware so that time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the set value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. You may comprise so that it can set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. Drive current values of all outputs of .about.Q23, Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 mA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided, such as the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in this embodiment, an effect is produced when light emission is sparse. Therefore, an error may be reduced by using an external reference resistor. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable member) In accordance with a control signal for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 9051 to 9054 (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120), and a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means, Output means (in this example, a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, a specific signal (in this example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electrical component, Luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 9016C. And control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H ( High) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 44 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and are mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 52, S is used in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. The terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. (High) is set to a low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to a normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, the S terminal is connected to the S terminal setting register, and the setting value of the register is changed by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that a low slew rate output state is achieved in terms of software. You may comprise so that it can set whether it is set as the output state of a slew rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards In this example, a substrate (in this example, the light emitter control substrates 9016C to 9016F) that performs only one of the transmissions of the control signal according to the normal slew rate output state is provided. It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a control signal output by one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 53, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G is branched on the board, The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413e on the same light emitter control board 9016G, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 9016G. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 90413e and 90413f even on the same light emitter control board 9016G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  In Modification 2 shown in FIG. 53, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413g mounted on the light emitter control board 9016H is branched on the board, and one of the branched branches The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. 49 (in this example, output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. In other words, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels). And the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 49, the output timing of the output signal from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, As shown in FIG. 51, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting the control signal (in this example, the time-out function). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high), see FIG. 46). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120 is, for example, production control process processing (see step S9065)). In the above, by repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c The lighting control is continuously executed or the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 46). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  Next, control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is fired based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When this game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the first is based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The start condition is met. Thereafter, the first start condition is established based on, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. In this way, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

  When the game ball launched toward the game area passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Is done. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, the second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the second start condition is established based on, for example, the end of the last special game or the big hit gaming state. In this way, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. When the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, based on the fact that the normal symbol variable display result by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure", the opening control or expansion opening where the movable wing piece of the electric tulip is in the tilting position is performed. Control is performed, and closing control and normal opening control for returning to the vertical position when a predetermined time elapses are performed. When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the expanded and opened state as the first variable state by the opening control and the expanding and opening control, the game ball can easily pass or can pass through the second start winning opening. The normal figure starting condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is established based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal chart start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display 9020 uses a normal symbol display 9020 based on the fact that the general map start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. The figure game is started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”.

  When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is set to “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result. Then, a variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and an effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

  After the special game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, “left”, “middle”, “right” arranged on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively.

  In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, a confirmed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 905MA derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. As a special symbol variable display result, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “big hit” (specific display result), and when a predetermined lose symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “Lose” (non-specific display result). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

  When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special game is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. As an example, if the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the winning combination is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is opened, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. The round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball switch 9023 detects the winning ball, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of gaming balls are paid out as the winning ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “16”) is reached. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls very easily, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a probable state based on the fact that the predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, and the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit probability) is higher than the normal state. Control may take place. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state becomes a short time state, and the short time control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 can control the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per normal figure”. By changing the length of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous manner by controlling the length of the ball to be longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as “high opening control” (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the “special game state” (“advantage game” which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is reduced. Also referred to as “state”). Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the main image display device 905MA, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state in which they match the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to fluctuation, enlargement / reduction, or deformation, or when multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol changes. An effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as “reach effect”. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern, etc., and the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (a big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In the reach production, it is only necessary to include a normal reach production and a super reach reach production with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is not a big hit combination, it is “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect of liquid crystal display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. In addition, on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example, an effect using a character image, or an effect of displaying a notification image based on the determination result of the big hit determination and the variation pattern is executed. The Various effects executed during variable display in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed are also referred to as “variable display effects”. As an example of effects during variable display, there is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state will reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation, the possibility that a super reach reach effect will be executed, variable display A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a “hit”.

  The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice effect patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach display is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach-miss combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived).

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may have valuable values that can be used for replaying with the pachinko gaming machine 901, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. Control, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), can be executed in a short time state The upper limit number of variable display becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The first probability (for example, 1/20), the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”). Such part or all of it to be the first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  For example, a NAND-ROM is used as a part or all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. The stored contents may be rewritable. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. Memory redundancy information may be stored in such a redundant area of the memory. The history information may be information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information may include at least one of model identification information such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 in which a memory has been used and date information. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each amusement store where the memory has been used. By storing history information in the redundant area of the memory in this way, there is no need to attach a barcode for recycling management outside the memory, and it is accurately recycled based on the history information stored in the memory. Management can be performed. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

  Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area that stores correspondence information indicating a correspondence relation between a defective area in the data area and an alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information is built in the memory, and the memory control unit is an arrangement that indicates a storage position of history information in the redundant area. Information may be stored. As described above, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area is stored, and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information is stored, thereby reading data from the alternative area. Similarly to the above, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. Game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, game control process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 901. Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  In the game control process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B and setting of opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED), variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like. It is a process that enables.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control processing, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. In the game control process shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 first determines whether or not a start win has occurred (step S9011). As an example, in step S9011, the input state (on or off) of a start winning signal that is a detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 9022A or the second start port switch 9022B is checked. What is necessary is just to determine with winning.

  If a start winning is generated in step S9011 (step S9011; Yes), a winning random number is stored (step S9012). As an example, in the process of step S9012, a random number circuit 90104 built in (or externally attached to) the game control microcomputer 90100, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, and the game control microcomputer In a computer 90100, a random number configured by using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 90102, etc., is updated at least in part by a game random number (random value for determining a variable display result, game state determination A part or all of the numerical data indicating the random number and the random number for determining the variation pattern) is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in a hold random number storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, for example.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9012, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S9013). As an example, in the process of step S <b> 9013, setting for transmitting a start winning designation command for notifying the occurrence of a start winning to the effect control board 9012 may be performed. If no start prize has been generated in step S9011 (step S9011; No), after executing the process of step S9013, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S9021). Then, a process corresponding to the determination value is selected from a plurality of processes previously described in the game control computer program and executed.

  For example, when the value of the game process flag is “0”, it is determined whether or not variable symbol display (variable display game) can be started (step S90101). As an example, in the process of step S90101, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the variable display game is “0” by checking the storage content of the hold random number storage unit. At this time, if the number of hold is other than “0”, the variable display is started because the start of the variable display has been satisfied and the variable display has not been started yet. Determine that it is possible. On the other hand, when the hold number is “0”, it is determined that variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S90101; No), the game control process is terminated.

  When variable display can be started in step S90101 (step S90101; Yes), a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result is determined (step S90102). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is referred to as “special figure display result”. In the process of step S90102, the game random number (random number for determining the variable display result, random number for determining the game state, fluctuation, etc.) stored in the head (storage area with the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit Read random number for pattern determination). The game random number read from the holding random value storage unit may be temporarily stored in a variable display random number buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100. Then, using a random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Here, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a probable variation state, the variable display result determination table is set so that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state. It is sufficient that the determination value is set.

  When the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the game state after the end of the big hit gaming state is further changed using the random number value for determining the gaming state and the gaming state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special gaming state. Corresponding to these determination results, a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result may be determined.

  Following the processing in step S90102, an internal flag and the like are set (step S90103). As an example, in the process of step S90103, when the variable display result is determined as “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. set. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a probability variation state, a probability variation confirmation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set to an on state, for example. In addition, it may be stored in such a way that it can be specified that the state is likely to change. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “1” (step S90104), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When the value of the game process flag is “1”, a variation pattern or the like is determined (step S90111). FIG. 55 shows a setting example of a variation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Each variation pattern indicates that the required time (variable display time) from the start of variable display to the display of a fixed symbol that is a variable display result can be specified and the outline of the production mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the main image display device 905MA is “non-reach” and “reach”. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the above and the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. For the variation pattern, a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance for each variation time (variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure game or the decorative design. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern, it is possible to determine the variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols.

  In the processing of step S90111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined rate using the variation pattern determination random value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, the variable display result may become “big hit” corresponding to each fluctuation pattern by changing the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern depending on whether or not the variable display result is decided as “big hit” (Big hit reliability) can be varied.

  In the process of step S90111, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” by determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”. . Alternatively, prior to determining the variation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by using the reach determination random number value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S90111, it is only necessary to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of reach.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9011, various control commands corresponding to the start of variable display are transmitted (step S90112). As an example, in the process of step S90112, as a variable display start command for designating the start of variable display, a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result, variable display such as decorative pattern variable display time and reach effect type, etc. A setting for transmitting a variation pattern designation command for notifying a variation pattern indicating a mode may be performed. Further, in response to the decrease in the hold count due to the start of variable display, a setting for transmitting a hold count notification command for notifying the hold count after the decrease may be performed.

  The variable display time is set in response to the change pattern being determined by the process of step S90112. Moreover, the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol by either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B may be performed. As an example, variable display of symbols may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Which special symbol display device using the special symbol on which special symbol display device is to be executed is a special symbol game based on whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning port or the second starting winning port It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special game is played by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the game ball passing through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, a special game is played by the second special symbol display device 904B. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “2” (step S90113), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When the value of the game process flag is “2”, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121). If the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90121; No), the special symbol variable display control is performed (step S90122), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121; Yes), the variable symbol special display is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the fixed symbol is performed (step S90123).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90123, various control commands corresponding to the end of variable display are transmitted (step S90124). As an example, in the process of step S90124, a variable display end command for instructing the end (stop) of variable display, or a big hit start specifying command (fanfare command for specifying the start of a big hit gaming state when the variable display result is “big hit”. ) And the like may be set for transmission.

  After executing the process of step S90124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125). If the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to “3” (step S90126), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing” instead of “big hit” (step S90125; No), the game process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0” (step S90125). S90127), the game control process is terminated. When the process of step S90127 is executed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time saving state is to be ended. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming state is ended. Settings for controlling to a normal state may be performed.

  When the value of the game process flag is “3”, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit gaming state according to whether or not a predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S90131). The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state have ended. When the big hit game state is not ended (step S90131; No), the game operation control at the time of the big hit is performed (step 132), and the game control process is ended. On the other hand, when ending the big hit gaming state (step S90131; Yes), the setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit ending is performed (step S90133).

  As an example, in the process of step S90133, it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation flag is on. If it is on, the probability change flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. Set to. Thus, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, and it is decided that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a probable change state, a game corresponding to this decision result is made. It is possible to control the state to a certain change state. Even in the case of controlling to the short-time state, the setting corresponding to this may be performed. Then, after clearing the game process flag and initializing its value to “0” (step S90134), the game control process process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described. The effect control board 9012 receives supply of power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. In the effect control microcomputer 90120 in which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 90130 executes effect control main processing.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control main process, the memory test process may be executed when a predetermined memory test condition is satisfied. The memory inspection process is a determination process for determining whether or not the programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are normal. In the memory inspection process, a checksum process is executed as a determination process, whereby the storage contents of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are inspected, and the checksum that is the inspection result can be displayed. The effect control main process includes a process for controlling effects by various effect devices, such as an effect control process executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt for effect control.

  In the production control main process, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be confirmed when a predetermined origin confirmation condition is satisfied. The origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are positions corresponding to the retracted state as shown in FIG. 36A, for example. Each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 may be determined in advance as a position where the movable members 9053 and 9054 are disposed below the main image display device 905MA. When the origin confirmation condition is satisfied, an initial operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is executed, and control for setting each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 to the origin position is performed. At this time, based on the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like by the movable member position sensor 9061, it is confirmed whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be stopped at the origin position. And when it cannot be made to stop at an origin position, abnormality notification is performed noting that origin abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90130. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90130 first checks the connection state of the board (step S9051). In step S9051, for example, it is specified whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the main board 9011 and whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the effect control relay board 9016A. In order to confirm the connection with the main board 9011, the CPU 90130 may determine whether an initialization command or a power recovery command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received after starting the time measurement by the internal timer. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing without receiving an initialization command or a power supply restoration command, it is only necessary to determine that the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected.

  FIGS. 57A and 57B show a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. As shown in FIG. 57A, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are physically connected to the effect control board 9012 by inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1. In addition, a connector (socket) CN1 for electrical connection is provided. As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control relay board 9016A are inserted into the effect control relay board 9016A by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1. Is provided with a connector (socket) CN2 for physically and electrically connecting the two. The harness HN1 only needs to be configured by binding a number of wiring cables. The connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 have corresponding numbers (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TN01) when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11. Any relationship that is physically and electrically connected is acceptable.

  FIG. 57C shows an input / output content setting example corresponding to the terminals TM01 to TM24 provided in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. Terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (AC24V is rectified and smoothed), VDL (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). In addition, terminals TM01 to TM24 are terminals TM03 and TM04 that supply data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on the drive control board 9016B and the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, and various data by a serial signal system. Terminals TM05 to TM08 for transmitting and receiving are included. Furthermore, a signal SM1 used for confirming connection with the effect control relay board 9016A can be input to the terminal TM22 among the terminals TM01 to TM24. As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the voltage of VCL output from the terminals TM20 and TM21 of the connector CN01 is the terminal of the connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A via the harness HN1. TN20 and TN21 are supplied. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 may be short-circuited on the board of the effect control relay board 9016A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, a voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of the connector CN11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1. The On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.

  In step S9051 shown in FIG. 56, in order to confirm the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A, the CPU 90130 determines the input state of the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. If the signal SM1 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected via the harness HN1. On the other hand, if the signal SM1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to no voltage supply, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM22 serving as the connection check terminal.

  Based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A (step S9052). In step S9052, when the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A, whereas the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 corresponds to no voltage supply. What is necessary is just to determine that there is no connection with the production control relay board 9016A in the low voltage state. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is no connection (step S9052; No), the relay unconnected flag is set to an on state (step S9053). If the relay unconnected flag is prepared in advance in a work memory 90131 built in the effect control microcomputer 90120 or a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 90120. Good. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is a connection, the relay unconnected flag is maintained in the OFF state by not performing the process of step S9053.

  Subsequently, based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011 (step S9054). In step S9054, it is determined that there is a connection with the main board 9011 when an initialization command or a power recovery command is received before a predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. What is necessary is just to determine with no connection with the main board | substrate 9011, when predetermined time passes, without receiving. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the presence or absence of a connection according to the presence or absence of command reception, but based on the voltage at a predetermined terminal serving as a connection confirmation terminal, as in the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A It may be determined whether or not there is a connection with the substrate 9011. If it is determined in step S9054 that there is no connection (step S9054; No), the memory inspection process (step S9055) is executed, and then the loop process is executed to stand by.

  In this embodiment, when power supply is started in a state in which a harness that binds cables as command lines for transmitting various control signals between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is not connected. The memory inspection condition is satisfied, and the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055. On the other hand, when the power supply is started in a state where the harness is connected between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, the memory inspection condition is not satisfied, and the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. In this manner, the memory inspection condition is established by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 with the cable (harness) serving as the command line attached between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 being removed. You may do it.

  Note that the memory inspection condition is not limited to that established when power is turned on with the command line disconnected, and is established, for example, when power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed. There may be. Alternatively, for example, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power in a state where the openable / closable gaming machine frame 903 is opened. In addition, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by detecting a predetermined arbitrary state.

  In the memory inspection process in step S9055, a checksum calculation using the data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is performed, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. When the memory inspection process is executed, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is temporarily turned off, and then the power switch is turned on again with the cable (harness) as the command line connected. The control can be performed. Alternatively, a cable (harness) as a command line may be connected and a reset switch may be pressed so that the production control can be performed without turning on the power again. Alternatively, after the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is once turned off, the power can be turned on in a state where the push button 9031B is not pressed, so that the effect can be controlled. In addition, when a predetermined effect control condition is satisfied, the process may proceed to step S9056 so that the effect can be controlled.

  If it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection (step S9054; Yes), an initial setting process (step S9056) is executed. In the initial setting processing in step S9056, for example, the storage area in the RAM 90122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and a CTC (counter and timer circuit) register is set that generates a timer interrupt for effect control. This initial setting process may include an effect data transfer process. In the effect data transfer process, predetermined data (a binary code constituting a program module, etc.) among programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and used to execute effects by various effect devices. Can be transferred to the RAM 90122, the VRAM 90141, or the like. Further, in the initial setting process, execution control of initial operations by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed along with the transfer of the effect data by the effect data transfer process. The initial operation performed at this time is, for example, an operation in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are changed (moved) from the retracted state to the advanced state, stopped in the advanced state until a predetermined time elapses, and then returned to the retracted state. And so on.

  After executing the initial setting process in step S9056, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057). If the relay unconnected flag is off (step S9057; No), the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in correspondence with the state-controlled relay board 9016A being connected ( Step S9058). In this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin abnormality (step S9059). If there is an origin abnormality (step S9059; Yes), the origin abnormality is notified (step S9060), and the process returns to step S9058. In addition, after notifying of the origin abnormality in step S9060, the process may proceed to step S9061.

  In step S9058, for example, in order to confirm the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054, detection signals from the movable member position sensor 9061 are acquired as position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 indicates the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054. In the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 57 (A), the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 may be included in the signals input to the serial reception terminal TM07. The CPU 90130 confirms the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 acquired by the general-purpose output controller 90145, and based on the position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054, whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 are at the origin position. I just need to be able to confirm. The notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 includes, for example, image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, or the top What can be executed by turning on a notification lamp provided separately from the frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, a notification operation using other effect devices, or a combination of some or all of them If it is. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on whether or not the origin is abnormal. As described above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be realized by controlling an arbitrary output.

  If it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 and the connector CN11 provided on the harness HN1 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected. The effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this case, the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is not input to the terminal TM07 of the connector CN01. For this reason, even if the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed, it is determined that the origin is abnormal, and an abnormality notification is executed. In particular, in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, for example, for the purpose of checking the operation of the production control microcomputer 90120, the power supply may be turned on when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. is there. In order to prevent frequent occurrence of abnormality notification in the manufacturing stage and the development stage and improve work efficiency, in response to the determination that the relay unconnected flag is turned on in step S9057, steps S9058 to S9060 are performed. Do not execute. Thereby, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is not confirmed, and the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the origin abnormality is not executed. .

  When it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057; Yes), or when it is determined in step S9059 that there is no origin abnormality (step S9059; No), the effect control main In the process, an effect random number update process (step S9061) is executed, and numerical data indicating a random number value to be an effect random number is updated by software. The effect random number is counted as various random values used for effect control. It should be noted that the effect random number that is updated by hardware using a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 may not be updated in the effect random number update process. Alternatively, the rendering random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random value updated by hardware.

  After performing the effect random number update process in step S9061, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state when a timer interrupt for effect control occurs. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9063), command analysis processing (step S9064), and the effect control process The process (step S9065) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns to step S9061. The command analysis process in step S9064 and the effect control process in step S9065 are included in the timer interrupt process for effect control. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9062; No), the process returns to step S9061 without executing the processes of steps S9063 to S9065.

  FIG. 68 shows an execution example of the abnormality notification in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the execution example shown in FIG. 58, the occurrence of the origin abnormality is notified by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. At this time, based on the position detection signal indicating the detection result by the movable member position sensor 9061, which of the upper mechanism (upper accessory) and the lower mechanism (lower accessory) in the effect movable mechanism 9050 is abnormal? May be displayed. As described above, in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of the game hall can recognize which type of anomaly is out of a plurality of types of anomalies configured using a plurality of movable members, the movable member Anomaly notification may be performed.

  Note that the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to view or cannot be viewed when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state. For this reason, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is given by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, there is a possibility that the store clerk or the like of the game hall may be difficult or impossible to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, with the image display by the main image display device 905MA or the like, or in place of the image display, using a notification unit that is visible regardless of the state of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed. May be performed. As such a notification unit, for example, it is provided at the upper position, left position, or right position of the gaming machine frame 903, and is included in the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, or top frame LED 909a or left A plurality of notification light emitting members provided separately from the frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c may be used. These notification light emitting members may be configured using, for example, LEDs. According to a combination of lighting modes by a plurality of light emitting members for notification, an abnormality notification of a movable member is performed in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can recognize which kind of an anomaly has occurred. It may be. As an example, when the notification unit includes a first notification light-emitting member and a second notification light-emitting member, an abnormality occurs in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. For example, the lighting control of the notification unit may be performed so that the first notification light emitting member is turned on while the second notification light emitting member is turned on when an abnormality occurs in the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. Thus, even if there is a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to recognize depending on the state of the movable member by notifying the abnormality of the movable member by using the notification unit that can be recognized regardless of the state of the movable member, the movable member. It is possible to report in an identifiable manner that an abnormality has occurred and which movable member has an abnormality.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute an interrupt process for receiving a command in addition to a timer interrupt process for effect control, and can receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. As long as it can be acquired from the host interface 90132. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, for example. In the command analysis process in step S9064, it is determined whether or not an effect control command has been received. If there is a reception, setting or control corresponding to the received command is performed. In the production control process in step S9065, for example, production image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged. Lighting on a plurality of arranged light emitters, lighting on various light emitting members such as top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c and decoration LED different from light emitter units 9071 to 9074, moving movable members 9051 to 9054 With respect to operation control contents using various effect devices such as drive operations of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S9055 of FIG. 56 as the memory inspection processing. In the memory inspection process, as a checksum calculation using the storage data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the first checksum calculation using the storage data in a plurality of storage areas provided in the ROM 90121 and the storage data in the ROM 90121 The second checksum calculation using all of the above, the third checksum calculation using the storage data in the plurality of storage areas provided in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and all of the storage data in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Of the fourth checksum calculation using, a part or all of the calculations may be executed. In this embodiment, after the second checksum operation is executed following the first checksum operation, an operation using all the stored data in each of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is executed as the fourth checksum operation. Each calculation result is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA.

  In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 59A, the CPU 90130 first sets a memory inspection setting table (step S90201). The memory check setting table is a table for setting a checksum calculation start address and a calculation end address by checksum calculation. The table data constituting the memory test setting table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (for example, the first storage area) of the ROM 90121, for example.

  FIG. 59B shows a configuration example of the memory inspection setting table. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 59B, the checksum calculation start address and calculation end address are designated in correspondence with the display counts of “0” to “5”, respectively. The number of display times is the number of times the checksum is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. After “0” is set as the initial value, 1 is added each time the calculation result by the checksum calculation is displayed. You can do it.

  Subsequent to the setting in step S90201 shown in FIG. 59A, the display count is set to “0” (step S90202). For example, in step S90202, it is only necessary to set the display count value to “0” by clearing (initializing) a display count counter prepared in advance. The display number counter may be configured using a built-in register of the CPU 90130, or may be configured using a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the display count is set (step S90203). For example, in step S90203, the clear data is set in the checksum data area and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the checksum calculation end address is set to be comparable with the address indicated by the pointer. These parameters may be set in a plurality of registers built in the CPU 90130, or may be set in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

  A checksum is calculated using the parameters set in step S90203 (step S90204). For example, in step S90204, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the stored data at the addresses of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C indicated by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new storage data in the checksum data area, and it is determined whether or not the address indicated by the pointer value has reached the calculation end address. If the calculation end address has not been reached, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and processing returns to the exclusive OR operation. When the calculation end address is reached, the checksum using the stored data from the calculation start address to the calculation end address can be obtained by inverting the value of each bit that is the contents of the checksum data area. .

  Along with the checksum calculation in step S90204, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205). If the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205; Yes), the calculation according to the display count is performed. The contents are updated and displayed (step S90206). Therefore, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the execution result of the checksum calculation is controlled so that it can be displayed. On the other hand, if the relay unconnected flag is off (step S90205; No), the process of step S90206 is not executed. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, control is performed so that the execution result of the checksum calculation is not displayed. In step S90206, the calculation contents are updated and displayed, and the determination result by the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal is the main image display device 905MA. It can be displayed on the display device.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S90207). If the checksum calculation is not completed (step S90207; No), the process returns to step S90204 to continue the checksum calculation. If the calculation is completed in step S90207 (step S90207; Yes), the display count is incremented by 1 (step S90208), and then it is determined whether the display count has reached the end determination value (step S90209). ). By setting, for example, “6” as the end determination value in advance, six checksum calculation results can be displayed corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. it can. If the end determination value has not been reached (step S90209; No), the process returns to step S90203, and if the end determination value has been reached, the memory inspection process ends.

  FIG. 60 shows a display example of the calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In this display example, as a checksum calculation result corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. 59B, three types (A) to (C) for the “program ROM” corresponding to the ROM 90121 are shown. Calculation results and the like are displayed, and three types of calculation results (A) to (C) are displayed for the “data ROM” corresponding to the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. In the display example of FIG. 60, the progress status (completion rate) of the checksum calculation and the presence / absence of an abnormality based on the calculation result are displayed so as to be confirmed. 60A corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA01 set when the display count is “0” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59B. In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the first storage area in which the program for effect control and various management data are stored. (B) of “program ROM” shown in FIG. 60 corresponds to the calculation start address MA02 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “1” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59 (B). In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the second storage area in which the audio data is stored. (C) of “program ROM” shown in FIG. 60 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59 (B). Thus, the checksum is calculated using all of the data stored in the ROM 90121. 60A corresponds to the calculation start address MA10 + 1 and the calculation end address MA20 set when the display count is “3” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123A. (B) of the “data ROM” shown in FIG. 60 corresponds to the calculation start address MA20 + 1 and the calculation end address MA30 set when the display count is “4” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59 (B). Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123B. (C) of “DATA ROM” shown in FIG. 60 corresponds to the calculation start address MA30 + 1 and the calculation end address MA40 set when the display count is “5” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123C.

  The checksum calculation result varies depending on the contents of the stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, when the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are nonvolatile semiconductor memories that can be electrically erased, written, and rewritten, such as an EEPROM or a NAND-ROM, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Different checksum calculation results can be obtained in accordance with the stored program for production control and various data versions. The memory check process as shown in FIG. 59A is executed to display the checksum calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, so that the ROM 90121 can be used in the manufacturing and development stages of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control programs and various data versions stored in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C can be easily confirmed. This facilitates version management of stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and can reliably prevent, for example, inconsistency between the effect control program and the version of audio data, image data, and the like. In addition to the checksum calculation result, version information indicating the version of the program for effect control and various data may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The version information may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. By displaying the version information along with the checksum calculation result, it is easier to check the version of the production control program and various data, and whether the stored data is incorrect by reading the checksum corresponding to the version It can be easily confirmed whether or not.

  Note that the storage data used for the checksum calculation, the number of times the checksum is displayed, and the like may be arbitrarily changed according to the setting of the memory inspection for the ROM 90121, the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like. Good. As an example, in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 59B, the checksum calculation corresponding to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” is not executed. By setting, the calculation result may be displayed for a smaller checksum. Alternatively, by adding the setting of the calculation start address and the calculation end address corresponding to the display count “6” or more, the calculation results may be displayed for more checksums.

  The memory inspection process shown in FIG. 59A is executed in step S9055 when it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56 that there is no connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 59A that the relay unconnected flag is ON, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. Therefore, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the update display in step S90206 is possible, and the determination of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is possible. The result can be displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. Even when the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 59A that the relay unconnected flag is off, an update display in step S90206 is performed. I will not. As a result, if only one of the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 is not connected to the production control board 9012, the determination result of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is not displayed. To control.

  Instead of the update display of the calculation content in step S90206, or together with the update display of the calculation content, arbitrary notification based on the checksum calculation result may be performed. For example, instead of or together with the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, or together with this image display, the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a and the left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c or top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, lighting of a notification lamp provided separately from right frame LED 909c, notification operation using other stage devices, a combination of some or all of these, etc. The notification which can specify the determination result of the determination process which determines whether the production data memorize | stored in ROM90121 or production data memory 90123A-90123C is normal may be performed. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on the checksum calculation result. Thus, the determination result as to whether or not the production data is normal may be any information that can be notified by controlling an arbitrary output.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S9065 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 61, the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines whether it is the BGM change timing (step S90151). For example, CPU 90130 may determine that it is the BGM change timing when a predetermined BGM change condition is satisfied based on an effect control command transmitted from main board 9011 or the like. As an example, the BGM change condition only needs to be set so as to be satisfied when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state.

  If it is determined in step S90151 that it is the BGM change timing (step S90151; Yes), the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music to be played back as BGM are specified (step S90152). For example, the predetermined area of the ROM 90121 includes data that can specify the start address and the end address in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A for the audio data corresponding to the music reproduced as BGM for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The BGM setting table may be stored in advance. The CPU 90130 may specify the start address and end address of the audio data by referring to the BGM setting table according to the gaming state specified based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90152, loop reproduction start control for starting loop reproduction in which the music to be BGM is repeatedly reproduced is performed (step S90153). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the sound processing circuit 90143 of a command indicating a loop reproduction instruction together with the start address and end address of the sound data specified in step S90152. The audio processing circuit 90143 may access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A and read the audio data from the start address and end address sections indicated in the command from the CPU 90130. Then, in accordance with the designation to perform loop playback, the music corresponding to the audio data is sequentially played back from the beginning, and when the end of the music is played back, the playback of the music may be repeated by returning to the beginning.

  With the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, for example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the music as the normal BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probability variation state, the music as the probability variation BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the short-time state, the music as the short-time BGM can be repeatedly reproduced.

  When it is determined in step S90151 that it is not the BGM change timing (step S90151; No), after executing the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, processing according to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130 determines the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and performs a process according to the determination value from a plurality of processes described in advance in the effect control program. Select and execute. The processing executed according to the determination value of the effect process flag includes the processing of steps S90170 to S90176.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received, and the variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The process etc. which determine whether to start are included. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the screen of the main image display device 905MA corresponding to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols on the above and other various presentation operations, it includes processing to determine fixed decorative symbols and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result, etc. Yes. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 90130 performs various controls from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011, etc., the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to display (derived display) is included. Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 side autonomously does not depend on the production control command from the main board 9011. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process starts the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command or the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. The process which determines whether it is performed is included. When the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while the variable display result corresponds to “lost”. If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Yes. When the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit effect processing, for example, the CPU 90130 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit effect executed in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set contents in the main image display device. Displaying on the screen of 905MA or the sub-image display device 905SU, executing display effects by the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and outputting sound effect signals to the sound output board 9013, the sound and effects from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound output, lighting frame output 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and decoration LED are turned on / off or blinking by output of illumination signals to the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and other effect control is executed. And a jackpot game To enable execution of the production in the big hit that corresponds to. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect process, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot end effect (ending effect) executed when the jackpot game state ends, and an effect image based on the set content Display, output of fruit sounds, turning on / off or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations are performed to enable execution of a jackpot end effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 62, the CPU 90130 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S90401). In step S90401, the CPU 90130 performs final processing based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the CPU 90130 determines different (unmatched) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 is updated by a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 or an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. Among the effect random numbers, numerical data indicating random values for determining the left determined symbol is extracted, and by referring to the left determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the “left ”Is determined in the decorative symbol display area 5L. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol is extracted from the random numbers for presentation, and by referring to a right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, etc. Of these, the right determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed. Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the CPU 131 determines the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols from the random numbers for rendering, and by referring to the left and right determined symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 and the like, Among them, the decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Furthermore, numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the medium fixed symbol among the random numbers for production is extracted, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, among the fixed decorative symbols, etc. The medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the CPU 90130 is the same in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The (coincident) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. CPU90130 extracts the numerical data which shows the random number value for jackpot fixed symbol determination among the random numbers for production. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are aligned and stopped. The decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative design (depicted decorative design) and the probability variation design (for example, the decorative design indicating an odd number) is the final decorative design. In the jackpot promotion promotion, a combination of decorative symbols (non-probable big hit combination) that recalls a big hit but does not recall a probable change state is once stopped and displayed in a promising state during the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state. This is an effect to notify whether or not.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S90401, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redraw lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability variation state by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination comprising the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S90401, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, a notice effect is determined (step S90402). In step S90402, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect or the effect mode when the notice effect is executed may be determined using a notice effect determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121, for example. In the notice effect determination table, for example, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number for determining the notice effect may be assigned to the presence / absence of the notice effect or the determination result of the effect mode according to the variable display content. . The CPU 90130 may determine the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode by referring to the notice effect determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the notice effect among the random numbers for effect.

  Following the determination of the notice effect in step S90402, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90403). For example, the CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of special figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. In addition, CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns corresponding to the determination result of the notice effect produced by the process of step S90402, and sets it as a use pattern.

  After determining the effect control pattern in step S90403, the CPU 90130 is provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S90404). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the main image display device 905MA is performed (step S90405). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S90404 is transmitted to the VDP 90140, etc., and provided on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The variation of the decorative pattern may be started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

  Following the process of step S90405, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, settings for updating the on-hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H are performed (step S90406). For example, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” in the start winning memory display area 905H may be deleted and the entire display part may be moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S90407), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 63A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 63A, the effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is composed of process data including The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 9011, or a predetermined process is performed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. Data indicating the timing of switching the presentation control may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents such as being executed. Pattern data constituting such an effect control pattern may be stored in advance in the ROM 90121 as management data.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. It is. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Even if display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. Good. In this case, if the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is designated by the display control data, the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters arranged in a line to constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 Can also be specified. It is not limited to what designates the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by the display control data, and the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters is controlled using control data different from the display control data. May be specified.

  The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects or the like in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. For example, the audio control data only needs to indicate various settings such as whether or not to perform loop playback in addition to the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. .

  The light emitter control data includes, for example, data indicating lighting operation modes in various light emitting members such as a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED. include. That is, the light emitter control data is data that specifies lighting operations of various light emitting members. The movable member control data includes data indicating the operation mode of the movable members 9051 to 9054, such as data indicating the drive mode of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for rotating and moving the movable members 9051 to 9054, for example. ing. In other words, the movable member control data is data for designating the rotation operation and the movement operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation effective period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button, or an instruction operation for the push button 9031B ( Data indicating an effect operation mode according to the player's operation action, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting (pressing operation) and data for specifying the control content of the effect operation when each operation is detected effectively. include.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, if there is process data that includes all of display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, process data that includes a part of these process data There may be. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, production model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member included in the production model may be included.

  FIG. 63B shows various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Moreover, you may perform control which performs the display production | presentation by turning on the some light-emitting body arranged in the light-emitting body unit 9071-9074 in the aspect designated with display control data. Furthermore, while performing control to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R in a mode specified by the audio control data, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in a mode specified by the light emitter control data, Various light emitting members such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are controlled to blink, and the trigger button, operation rod, or push button 9031B of the stick controller 9031A is controlled during the operation effective period specified by the operation detection control data. Control to accept the operation and determine the contents of the production. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. The storage address of the pattern data constituting the pattern in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the CPU 90130 performs the effect devices (main image display device 905MA, sub-image display device 905SU, light emitter unit 9071) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. To 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, various light emitting members including the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable members 9051 to 9054, the decorative member 9057, etc. ) Control proceeds. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, light emitter control data # 1 to light emitter control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n indicating the content of control of the production operation and designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to the VDP 90140, the audio processing circuit 90143, the general-purpose output controller 90145, and the like. The VDP 90140 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 reads the image data (image element data) indicated by the command from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stores them in the work area of the VRAM 90141. The VDP 90140 selects image data corresponding to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU from the image data stored in the work area of the VRAM 90141, and converts the selected image data into pixel data. For example, it is arranged at a predetermined position in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141 (a position indicated by information indicating a display position in a display area such as the main image display device 905MA). As a result, display data for one screen is created in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141. At this time, display data used to create lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU. In addition, the voice processing circuit 90143 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 develops the voice data indicated by the command by temporarily storing it in a voice RAM or the like.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 64, the CPU 90130 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, an effect control process timer value (step S90451). As an example, in step S90451, the presentation control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and variable display is performed when an end code is read from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the updated presentation control process timer value. What is necessary is just to determine with time having passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; No), it is determined whether or not it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452). The super reach production start timing is a timing at which execution of the reach production in the super reach is started. For example, the super reach production start timing may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. If it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452; Yes), BGM off setting is performed (step S90453). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to OFF according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn off the output. In the period in which the BGM is off, the music corresponding to the BGM may be continuously played back by merely setting the BGM volume to off. Alternatively, during the period when the BGM is off, the reproduction of the music corresponding to the BGM may be paused. After performing the BGM off setting in step S90453, the music on setting for super reach production is performed (step S90454). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the start address and the end address of the audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production by a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. The audio processing circuit 90143 acquires audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production based on the start address and end address of the audio data notified by the instruction from the CPU 90130. Then, while setting the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to ON, the music corresponding to the audio data may be reproduced sequentially from the top.

  If it is not the super reach production start timing in step S90452 (step S90452; No), or after performing the music on setting in step S90454, it is determined whether it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455). The super reach production end timing is a timing at which the execution of the reach production in the super reach is finished, and may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. When it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455; Yes), the music off setting for the super reach production is performed (step S90456). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to OFF in accordance with a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the music for super reach production may be set off and the reproduction of the music or the like may be terminated. After performing the music off setting for the super reach production in step S90456, the BGM on setting is performed (step S90457). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to ON according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the BGM volume may be changed and the output may be turned on.

  If it is not the super reach production end timing in step S90455 (step S90455; No), or after performing the BGM on setting in step S90457, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. Then, after performing other effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative design (step S90458), the variable display effect processing is ended.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90459). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90459; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If a symbol determination command is received in step S90459 (step S90459; Yes), for example, a final stop that is a display result in variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 90140, for example. A control for deriving and displaying a symbol (definite decorative symbol) is performed (step S90460). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S90461). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90462), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 64, after performing the music-off setting for the super reach effect in step S90456, the BGM-on setting is immediately performed in step S90457. On the other hand, the BGM on setting may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the music off setting is performed in step S90456. For example, the BGM on setting may be performed after the control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol in step S90460. Alternatively, the BGM on setting may be performed when the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 shown in FIG. 61 is executed. In particular, when the variable display result is “big hit”, following the music off setting for super reach production, the fanfare production music that notifies that the variable display result is “big hit” is played, Then, in response to the gaming state becoming the big hit gaming state, the music for the big hit directing may be reproduced. Note that the music for the super reach production may be directly played as the music for the big hit production as it is. In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit”, after the big hit gaming state is finished, if the BGM on setting is performed corresponding to the execution of the variable display start waiting process of step S90170 shown in FIG. Good. Thereby, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is possible to smoothly start the reproduction of the music to be BGM.

  In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 64, based on the effect control process timer value from the effect control pattern (for example, special effect change effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step S90403 shown in FIG. Using the process data acquired in this way, control for executing the rendering operation by various rendering devices is performed. Also in the big hit effect process in step S90175 and the big hit end effect process in step S90176 shown in FIG. 61, the CPU 90130 reads out the effect control pattern from the ROM 90121 or the like, and uses the process data acquired based on the effect control process timer value. What is necessary is just to make it control for performing presentation operation | movement by various production | presentation apparatuses.

  In order to perform such effect control, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out, and switches the effect control execution data in the process data when time-out occurs. That is, in the process data # 1 to process data #n as shown in FIG. 63A, the display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is performed based on the display control data set next. The lighting control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be performed. Also, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, audio output control of the speakers 908L and 908R is performed based on the audio control data set next. Further, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on the light emitter control data set next, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Lighting control of the frame LED 909c and the decoration LED is performed. In process data # 1 to process data #n, drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed based on the movable member control data set next. In addition, in process data # 1 to process data #n, the detection control of the instruction operation by the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is performed based on the operation detection control data set next.

  In the effect control microcomputer 90120, the VDP 90140 reads various image data such as character image data necessary for displaying the effect image from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B based on a display control command from the CPU 90130, and a predetermined area of the VRAM 90141. To place. When the effect image is displayed, the same character image may be repeatedly displayed many times. When the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is compressed, it takes time to decompress the image data after reading it. Therefore, by placing necessary character image data in the storage area of the VRAM 90141 at the stage of starting the display of the effect image, it is compared with reading out from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B corresponding to each frame. The time required for drawing can be shortened.

  CPU 90130 sets an attribute in the attribute register of VDP 90140 each time V blank occurs after display of the effect image is started, and then instructs execution of reading of the attribute. In response to this, the VDP 90140 reads the attribute. When this reading is completed, a reading end interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130. When the CPU 90130 receives the reading end interrupt signal, the CPU 90130 instructs the execution of the drawing process. Thus, the VDP 90140 executes a drawing process by writing display data to the VRAM 90141 according to the read attribute.

  In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer are assigned to each of a plurality of storage areas to which an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 800 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 600 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the main frame buffer. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and also stores display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. May be. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 480 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 885 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the subframe buffer.

  Image data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 corresponds to an image size of 320 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 320 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction), for example. Yes. The VDP 90140 reduces the image data for lighting data creation to an image size of 80 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 80 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The reduced image size corresponds to the resolution of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in which a plurality of light emitters are aligned. Thus, the image data for lighting data creation has a resolution higher than that of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As an example, anti-aliasing processing such as supersampling is performed. As another example, the RGB value corresponding to the upper left dot is obtained and displayed as the display data for each rectangular range of 4 dots × 4 dots in the vertical and horizontal directions in the image data, so that the vertical and horizontal directions are each 1/4. Display data reduced in size may be created. In this way, display data to be converted into lighting data is created using image data having a resolution higher than the display resolution of the plurality of light emitters. Thereby, for example, jaggy generated in the contour of a character image or the like can be suppressed, and the smoothness of display in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be enhanced. In particular, when an effect image such as a character image is moved and displayed, the contour portion can be displayed smoothly, and the interest of the display effect in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. Note that the image size reduction may be performed in the image data transformation process or display data rendering process by the VDP 90140, or may be performed using a predetermined scaler circuit. The scaler circuit only needs to be able to reduce the image size at a predetermined reduction ratio (for example, 1/4) by converting the number of pixels of the display data read from the VRAM 90141. As described above, the size change of the display data may be realized by a hardware circuit, or may be realized by executing a predetermined program as software.

  The image data read by the VDP 90140 may be used to create lighting data by being written in a predetermined area (light emitter lighting data area) in the subframe buffer. On the other hand, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA by being written in the main frame buffer. Further, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU by being written in an area other than the light emitter lighting data area in the subframe buffer. In this way, even for the same image data, it is only necessary to be able to use differently depending on the writing position in the VRAM 90141. Thus, the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stored in the VRAM 90141 is for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU or the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As long as it can also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting. Accordingly, the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B includes at least the effect image display control in the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU and the lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It can be used for either control.

  For example, one frame of display data stored in the subframe buffer is output in 1/60 second (about 16.7 milliseconds). As a result, the sub-image display device 905SU can update the display image at a frame period of 1/60 seconds. If the data for controlling the illuminant is also added to the data for displaying the sub-image, it can be output at a period of 1/60 seconds. In the light emitter control board 9016C, the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151. Therefore, the buffer memory 90151 may store data for controlling the light emitter at a 1/60 second period in which the VDP 90140 outputs display data for one frame.

  In the light emitter control board 9016C, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a shorter cycle than a frame cycle (such as 1/60 second) of an image display device using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) such as the sub image display device 905SU. Lighting data for lighting control of a plurality of light emitters may be generated. As a specific example, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter at a period of 1/120 second (about 8.3 milliseconds). As described above, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data of the light emitter in a cycle (1/120 seconds) shorter than the output cycle (1/60 seconds) of the display data by the VDP 90140, and the serial output circuit 90153 A control signal based on the lighting data is output. In this case, the buffer memory 90151 can store the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame output from the VDP 90140, that is, the light emitter control data of 80 dots × 80 dots. It only needs to have a storage data capacity. Further, by turning on the light emitters in a relatively short cycle, flicker (flickering) in a display effect executed by a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be suppressed and displayed. The interest of the production can be improved. The lighting control of the illuminant is not limited to the one that is performed at a period that is ½ of the output period of the display data. What is necessary is just to be performed with an arbitrary cycle shorter than that.

  The serial output circuit 90153 has the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 in a cycle longer than the time required for the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame to be written in the buffer memory 90151. It may be set to output a control signal corresponding to the data. In this manner, the light emission control data corresponding to one frame is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 in a time shorter than the cycle in which the control signal corresponding to the lighting data is output. As a result, even when the buffer memory 90151 having a storage data capacity capable of temporarily storing light emission control data corresponding to one frame is used, the lighting data can be stored in a time shorter than the output period of the control signal corresponding to the lighting data. Generation can be completed.

  Note that the buffer memory 90151 has a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for a plurality of frames, such as display data corresponding to image display for two frames. It may be. In this case, a plurality of buffer areas are allocated to the storage area of the buffer memory 90151. Each buffer area only needs to have a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for one frame.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides the data into a plurality of data ranges according to the storage position (reading address or the like) of the buffer memory 90151 storing the light emission control data. For example, the storage area of the buffer memory 90151 is divided into a plurality of buffer memory areas according to the storage address. Based on which data stored in which buffer memory area is read out, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 converts the lighting data of the light emitters included in which light emitter block among the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Specify whether to convert.

  The display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is assigned to any one of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 for each data range divided into a plurality. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 can specify the data range assigned to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 by referring to an address specification table serving as conversion setting information prepared in advance. Based on this identification result, address information of the light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block B01 to B42 can be designated. The address specifying table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including address information and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output the lighting data to the light emitter driving unit 90154.

  In addition, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes gradation data indicating the gradation control amount of each light emitting element constituting each of the plurality of light emitters. For example, the gradation data only needs to indicate the output period (pulse width) of the pulse signal in PWM control as the gradation control amount. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 refers to a lighting data generation table serving as color conversion setting information prepared in advance based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. Thus, gradation data indicating the gradation control amount is generated. The lighting data generation table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152.

  The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 corresponds to the number of gradations smaller than the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data used for the conversion. For example, the display data that is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A and temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is made possible in 256 stages so that the luminance (gradation) is at any level from “0” to “255”. Thus, the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is “256”. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a luminance (gradation) of any one of “0” to “63” for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is made possible in 64 stages so that the level becomes. Thus, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 indicates the number of gradations of “64” which is smaller than “256”.

  The correspondence relationship between the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data and the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter is the light emission corresponding to each emission color. It may be determined in advance in consideration of element characteristics (for example, light emission efficiency) and white balance. As an example, a light-emitting diode serving as a light-emitting element constituting each light-emitting body has nonlinear characteristics in which the amount of current increases rapidly when the applied voltage reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, if converted to a gradation control amount proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, there is a risk that display inconveniences caused by a plurality of light emitters such as overexposure and blackout may occur. is there. Therefore, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emitting elements corresponding to the respective light emission colors constituting each of the plurality of light emitters have a light emission amount equivalent to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. The setting information for converting to may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  FIG. 65 shows a configuration example of the lighting data generation table TC1 referred to by the lighting data generation circuit 90152. In the lighting data generation table TC1, the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is set corresponding to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. Here, for each of the display colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data, the luminance (gradation) is any level from “0” to “10”. In this case, the table data may be configured so that the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is at a level of “0”. That is, for each light emitting element of each display color included in one light emitter corresponding to one dot, when the brightness (gradation) shown in the display data is “10” or less, the brightness of each display color By generating lighting data in which (gradation) is “0”, a restriction is provided so that the light emitter is not lit.

  On the other hand, the lighting data generation table TC1 has at least one luminance (gradation) of “11” or more for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data. In this case, the table data may be configured so that lighting data indicating RGB values proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is generated. For example, when the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the display data is “11”, the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is “2”. If the luminance of R (red) or G (green) indicated by the display data is “0” to “3”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “4” is generated. If “7”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “1” is generated, and if “8”-“11”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “2” is generated. Thus, the table data of the lighting data generation table TC1 is configured.

  The image data read by the VDP 90140 from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B by the effect control microcomputer 90120 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are turned on. It may also be used for creating lighting data to be controlled. At this time, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data created from the image data used for image display is less than a predetermined amount, the same proportional relationship as when the luminance is greater than the predetermined amount If the lighting data is generated below, the influence of the non-linear characteristic in the light emitting diode becomes significant, and an unnatural display effect may be performed. Therefore, according to the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data, when the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited so that the light emitter is not turned on. Thus, the lighting control is made different between the light emitters whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount and the light emitters whose amount is the predetermined amount or more among the plurality of light emitters. In particular, in this embodiment, a light emitter whose light emission amount is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount is provided with a restriction so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. The lighting control is performed according to the RGB value of the lighting data that is proportional to the RGB value of the display data. In this way, by varying the lighting control depending on whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, the influence due to the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is reduced, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the display effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the production.

  A plurality of types of lighting data generation tables may be prepared in advance, and any one of the lighting data generation tables may be selected as a usage table based on a predetermined selection setting. In this case, a different lighting data generation table may be selected for each light emission color of the light emitting element included in each light emitter. For example, in the case of the light emitter blocks B01 to B06, the lighting data generation table TR01 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG01 is selected according to the emission color G (green). The lighting data generation table TB01 is selected according to the color B (blue). On the other hand, in the case of the light emitter blocks B07, B08, and B15, the lighting data generation table TR02 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table according to the emission color G (green). TG02 is selected, and the lighting data generation table TB02 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). In the case of the light emitter blocks B09 to B14, the lighting data generation table TR03 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG03 is selected according to the emission color G (green). The lighting data generation table TB03 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Each lighting data generation table indicates the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicating the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data created by the VDP 141 by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include table data to be converted into The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is designated by the lighting data by referring to the selected lighting data generation table based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. The gradation control amount is determined.

  The characteristics of the light emitting element may differ depending on the emission color. Therefore, the display data is converted so that the correspondence with the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is converted into a gradation control amount depending on the emission color of each light emitting element constituting the light emitter. Setting information for converting from to lighting data may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  It is only necessary that the display data can be converted into lighting data by using different lighting data generation tables according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block. Each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 emits light at the same gradation according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters depending on the size of the region in which the plurality of light emitters are arranged and arranged, the front-rear relationship of each light emitter unit, and the like. In some cases, the player may have a different impression. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emission amount can give an impression as uniform as possible corresponding to the same display color. Setting information for conversion to is stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  Thus, not only the display color levels (RGB values) indicated by the display data, but also the respective light emitters according to the light emission characteristics of each of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting the light emitter, the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters, and the like. Gradation data indicating a gradation control amount corresponding to is generated. Accordingly, even when light emitters including a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors are arranged in a predetermined region of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the color reproducibility is enhanced and the effect of the production is enhanced. To improve.

  Note that not all lighting data is generated by referring to the lighting data generation table, and at least a part of the lighting data is generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 executing a predetermined data processing program. May be. For example, for each of the R (red), G (green), and B (blue) display colors indicated in the display data, it is determined whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, and any light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount. In such a case, a process of generating lighting data with luminance (gradation) of “0” may be executed so that the light emitter is not turned on.

  As an example, in the lighting data generation process executed by the lighting data generation circuit 90152, display data for one dot is acquired, and it is determined whether all the RGB values indicated by the display data are “10” or less. . If all the values are “10” or less, the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”. On the other hand, if at least one of the RGB values indicated by the display data is not “10” or less, the lighting data generation table corresponding to the light emitter block and the light emission color is selected. Subsequently, lighting data corresponding to the display data is generated using the selected lighting data generation table. Then, it is determined whether or not the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots has been completed. If the generation of lighting data has not yet been completed, display data corresponding to the next one dot is acquired, and the same processing is performed. You only need to repeat it. On the other hand, when the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots is completed, the lighting data generation process may be terminated.

  The lighting data generation process is not limited to the generation of lighting data by referring to the lighting data generation table, and the lighting data may be generated by executing a predetermined arithmetic processing program. For example, in display data that enables gradation control in 256 steps for each display color, the luminance (gradation) of each display color is represented by 8 bits when binary display is used. On the other hand, in the lighting data that enables gradation control in 64 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 6 bits when binary display is used. Therefore, when at least one of the RGB values indicated in the display data is not “10” or less, numerical processing is performed to round down the lower 2 bits of the 8-bit data indicating the luminance (gradation) of each display color in the display data. By performing the above, lighting data may be generated. Alternatively, lighting data corresponding to the display data may be generated according to a preset arithmetic expression. A plurality of types of arithmetic processing programs that can be used for conversion from display data to lighting data are prepared in advance, and the lighting data generation circuit 90152 is selected according to the display color or arrangement (light emitter block, etc.) of the light emitting elements. Display data may be converted into lighting data by selecting and executing the arithmetic processing program.

  The display data is acquired for each dot and is not limited to the setting and generation of lighting data. For example, the setting and generation of lighting data may be performed collectively by using predetermined mask data. In this case, with respect to one frame of display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151, dots having all RGB values of “10” or less are detected, and RGB in the lighting data corresponding to the detected dots is detected. Mask data for setting all values to “0” may be prepared in advance.

  In addition, when all the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are “10” or less, the present invention is not limited to the one that sets all the RGB values in the lighting data to “0”. If any of the RGB values indicated by the display data is “10” or less, only the lighting data corresponding to the display color may be set to “0”. As an example, the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “100”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) is “8”, and the luminance (gradation) of B (blue) is In the case of “2”, the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the lighting data is “25”, while the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “ The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured to be “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this manner, for each light emitting element of each display color in the light emitter, a restriction may be provided so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter that causes the light emission amount to be less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. However, if there is a display color with an RGB value of “10” or less among the display data for one dot, the color of the emission color is set when the RGB value in the lighting data for only that display color is set to “0”. May change. Therefore, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are all “10” or less, it is desirable that the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”.

  Alternatively, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are added and the total value is less than a predetermined value, the RGB values in the lighting data may all be set to “0”. As an example, when the total value obtained by adding the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data is “30” or less, the lighting data indicates The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured such that the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is all “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this case, even if the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “11”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “0”. If so, the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is all “0”. In this way, by limiting the lighting of the light emitters so that the total (total amount) of the light emission amounts of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting one light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the production without giving a sense of discomfort to the display production.

  In addition, according to the RGB value of the display data, the light emission amount is not limited to the one that does not perform the lighting control of the light emitter that is less than the predetermined amount. For example, the influence due to the non-linear characteristic of the light emitting element is considered. Arbitrary restrictions may be provided. As an example, if the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is “0” to “8”, lighting data indicating the luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “9” or The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that lighting data having a luminance (gradation) of “1” if “10” is generated, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 performs a predetermined calculation. A processing program may be executed. As described above, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited to be performed with a correspondence relationship different from the proportional relationship when the display color is greater than the predetermined amount. May be provided. Further, the threshold value of whether or not the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than the predetermined amount is not limited to the RGB value in the display data being “10”, and considering the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element, etc. Any value may be set. Depending on the light emission color (display color) of the light emitting element, the threshold for determining whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount may be set differently.

  The image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is not limited to that used for both display control and lighting control, and dedicated image data is prepared in order to create lighting data. 90123A and 90123B may be stored. In this case, the image data is set in advance so that when the lighting data is generated in a proportional relationship with the display data, the illuminant whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without lighting control. You may make it do. Lighting data may be created using the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C. Also in this case, the light emission data may be set in advance so that the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without the lighting control.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including gradation data to which address information assigned to the light emitter driver above or below the digit is added, and the serial output circuit 90153 transmits the light data to the light emitter driver 90154. Is output. Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data for performing dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including drive control data to which address information assigned to the strobe-side light emitter driver is added, and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output to the light emitter drive unit 90154.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a common clock signal to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21 as the serial clock SC shown in FIG. The serial clock SC output from the serial output circuit 90153 is supplied to each of the plurality of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter driver 90154 via the serial signal wiring. Each light emitter driver receives serial data SD transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock SC.

  On the other hand, the serial output circuit 90153 may output a control signal including drive control data and gradation data at different timings as serial data SD depending on each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. When a control signal is output to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 at the same timing, lighting control of a large number of light emitters at the same timing is performed by a large number of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter drive unit 90154. May be started. In this case, a large amount of drive current flows as an inrush current in a short period of time, which may cause radio interference due to noise radio waves. In addition, the manufacturing cost may increase as a power supply circuit for generating a large amount of drive current is required. On the other hand, by generating a control signal as serial data SD at different timings according to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21, generation of inrush current is suppressed, generation of noise radio waves, and production An increase in cost can be prevented.

  In the luminous body drive unit 90154, each luminous body driver checks whether or not the luminous body driver address indicated by the address information included in the received serial data SD matches the luminous body driver address assigned to itself. To do. At this time, if they match, serial data SD as drive control data and gradation data is taken in and converted into parallel data, and lighting control of the light emitter is performed based on this. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. Further, the light emitter driver on the upper side or the lower side of the digit outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data, thereby controlling the gradation of the plurality of light emitters connected to the digit signal line. Thus, the dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters is performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 included in the movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050 are aligned. The display effect by the lighting mode of the several light-emitting body arrange | positioned is performed.

  As an example of a specific display effect by the effect moving mechanism 9050, in the retracted state (first state) in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect moving mechanism 9050 are separated and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is visible. The display effect using the plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 that can be visually recognized by the player is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the retracted state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are positioned above and the movable members 9053 and 9054 are positioned below. Thus, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the retracted state where they are not rotating (when stopped), only the light emitters that are visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901 among the plurality of light emitters. Control the lighting. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced. As the display effect by the lighting control of the light emitters, for example, characters and symbols are displayed, or blinking and light emission colors of a plurality of light emitters are moved in a predetermined order, so that the display can be adjusted according to the variable display by the main image display device 905MA. A display effect or the like may be executed. Further, when the reach effect is executed, at least one of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be moved (vibrated, advanced, etc.), or a character or symbol such as “reach” can be displayed using a plurality of light emitters. Good.

  On the other hand, in the advanced state (second state) where the upper mechanism and lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized, it is disposed on the movable members 9051 to 9054. The display effect using all the plurality of light emitters is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA or independently of the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the advanced state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 rotate as the decorative member 9057 moves downward in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, and the movable members 9053 and 9054 of the lower mechanism are positioned above. . As described above, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the advanced state in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating (when operating), all the plurality of light emitters are controlled to be lit.

  The integrated display effect in the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be started before or during the change of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 from the retracted state to the advanced state. As described above, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating, the display effect may be executed by turning on all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is visible. Thereby, the effect of the turning operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be increased. In addition, by lighting all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not they can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player can visually recognize the light emitters that are not subjected to the lighting control by simple control. Can be suppressed.

  The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 are provided with a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a program management area R01 serving as a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, and a voice data first storage area serving as a second storage area in which voice data is stored. R11 is provided. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with an audio data second storage area R12 as a storage area for storing audio data and an image data first storage area R21 as a storage area for storing image data. The effect data memory 90123B is provided with an image data second storage area R22 as a storage area for storing image data. Audio data used for controlling audio output by the speakers 908R and 908L is stored in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12. In the first image data storage area R21 and the second image data storage area R22, together with the image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the light emitter units 9071- Image data used for lighting control in a plurality of light emitters aligned in 9074 may be stored.

  FIG. 66A shows a configuration example of audio data stored in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. . In the example shown in FIG. 66 (A), the start address and end address in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 in which the respective audio data are stored correspond to a plurality of music pieces. Is set. For example, the audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is used for playing a normal BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, and is stored in a section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03. Yes. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is used for reproducing the effect sound at the time of the super reach production in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and is stored in the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05. . The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 and the music A-2 may be stored in the audio data first storage area R11.

  The audio data corresponding to the music piece B-1 in FIG. 66 (A) is used to reproduce the BGM that is in the probability changing state in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probability changing state, and from the start address MA19 + 1 to the end address MA21. It is stored in the section. Here, the start address MA09 + 1 of the music B-1 has an address value smaller than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. Yes. On the other hand, the end address MA1a of the music B-1 is an address value larger than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. Included. As described above, the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 spans both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. It is memorized. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 is used to play back the short-time BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the short-time state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1a + 1 to the end address MA1c. . The audio data corresponding to the music piece X is used for reproducing the production sound during the big hit where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the big hit gaming state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11. . All of the audio data corresponding to the music B-2 and the music X may be stored in the audio data second storage area R12.

  The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 shown in FIG. 66 (A) includes both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. In addition, it is stored across. Even in this case, the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 are provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A where consecutive addresses are given, so the music B-1 is reproduced. Sometimes, as in the case of playing other music, the start address and end address of the audio data are designated, the read address is updated sequentially from the start address, and the audio data is read out, so that it corresponds to the music B-1. Audio data to be read can be appropriately read.

  66 (B1) to 66 (B4) are timing charts showing an operation example of playing music in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. Among these, FIG. 66 (B1) shows a period of “execution” in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is being executed and “stop” in which it is stopped. FIG. 66 (B2) shows a gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. FIG. 66 (B3) shows a music to be reproduced among a plurality of music that can be reproduced using the audio data as shown in FIG. 66 (A). FIG. 66 (B4) shows a storage area from which audio data is read out of the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Show.

  Execution of the variable display shown in FIG. 66 (B1) is started before the timing T01 is reached. At this time, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 66 (B2) is a normal state. If the reach effect in the super reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in such a normal state, the start address MA02 is set so that the music A-1 as the normal BGM shown in FIG. To the end address MA03, audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is read out. A section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, until the timing T01 is reached, loop playback of the music A-1 to be played is performed as shown in FIG. 66 (B3), and the first audio data storage area R11 is played as shown in FIG. 66 (B4). Is an area for reading audio data.

  Thereafter, at timing T01, reach production in super reach is started. At this time, when it is determined that it is the super reach production start timing in the process of step S90452 shown in FIG. 64, the BGM off setting is performed by the process of step S90453. And the music ON setting for a super reach production is performed by the process of step S90454. Thus, in the period when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, from the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 so that the music A-2 for super reach effect shown in FIG. 66 (A) is reproduced. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is read out. A section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, from the time when the super reach production start timing is reached at timing T01 to the time when the super reach production end timing is reached at timing T02, as shown in FIG. As shown in 66 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 is an audio data read target area.

  At timing T02, it is determined that it is the super reach production end timing in the process of step S90455 shown in FIG. At this time, the music off setting for the super reach effect is performed by the process of step S90456, and the BGM on setting is performed by the process of step S90457. Thereafter, at timing T03, based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 66 (B2), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, a dedicated music for notifying that the variable display result becomes “big hit” may be played during the period from timing T02 to timing T03. . Even when the variable display result is “losing”, a dedicated music corresponding to the execution of the reach effect in the super reach may be played. Alternatively, the music A-2 for super reach production may be continuously played until the timing T03. Or, in order to clearly notify the variable display result, the reproduction of the music may be paused.

  When the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03, the sound corresponding to the song X from the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is reproduced so that the song X for the big hit medium effect shown in FIG. 66 (A) is reproduced. Data is read out. The section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, from the time when the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03 to the end of the jackpot gaming state at timing T04, the music X is to be played as shown in FIG. 66 (B3), and FIG. As shown, the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area.

  At timing T04, the big hit gaming state is ended, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probability changing state. At this time, it is determined in step S90151 shown in FIG. 61 that it is the BGM change timing. Then, by the processing of steps S90152 and S153, the music B-1 is started from the section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a so that the music B-1 as the probability changing BGM shown in FIG. Is read out. The section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a is included in both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, when the music B-1 is played back in a loop in the probability changing state, the audio data read target area becomes the audio data first storage area R11 of the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 of the effect data memory 90123A. There is a period. For example, in the period from timing T04 to timing T08, loop playback of the music B-1 to be played is performed as shown in FIG. 66 (B3). In this period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05 and in the period from timing T06 to timing T07, the audio data first storage area R11 is an audio data read target area as shown in FIG. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T05 to timing T06 and in the period from timing T07 to timing T08, as shown in FIG. 66 (B4), the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area. Even during the period after timing T08, the music B-1 as the BGM during the probability variation may be played back in a loop until the probability variation state ends or until the reach effect in the super reach is executed. Good.

  As described above, when the music B-1 that is the BGM being changed in the probability changing state is played back in a loop, the audio data read target area is provided in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. The audio data is switched to the second storage area R12. The audio data second storage area R12 in the effect data memory 121 corresponds to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the audio data first storage area R11 in the ROM 90121. Therefore, if the start address MA09 + 1 and the end address MA1a of the music B-1 are designated, the CPU 90130 can read the audio data while updating (incrementing) the address as in the case of reproducing other music, and the music B- The audio data corresponding to 1 can be smoothly read out from both the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12, and the music B-1 can be reproduced.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56, at least a part of the effect data is included in the effect data used for the execution of effects by various effect devices by executing the effect data transfer process in the initial setting process in step S9056. However, it may be transferred from the ROM 90121 to the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131, or may be transferred from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C to the VRAM 90141 or the like. In this case, for example, control for transferring the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B to the VRAM 90141 is started, and an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 or the like may be executed in parallel with this transfer. . As described above, by performing the initial operation of the movable member in parallel with the transfer of the predetermined production data, the production data can be efficiently transferred and the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

  Alternatively, the first effect data used for the execution of the effect by the display device, such as the main image display device 905MA, for example, the effect by the display device such as the operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be transferred with priority over the second effect data used for the execution of effects different from. In this case, in parallel with the transfer of the second effect data, the initial signal is supplied to the main image display device 905MA or the like using the already transferred first effect data. As a result, the production data is efficiently transferred, and the initial display by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA can be started within a short time after the power supply is started. Stable display can be suppressed.

  In the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial display of the display device may be started after the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial operation of the movable member is started. Further, in the effect data transfer process, transfer of normal data for operation used for normal operation of the movable member may be started, and then transfer of normal data for display used for normal display of the display device may be started. Thus, for example, the effect data used to execute the effect by the second effect device, such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, can be obtained from the effect data used to execute the effect by the first effect device such as the main image display device 905MA. Is also given priority. Thereby, the production data is efficiently transferred, and for example, the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be started within a short time after the power supply is started, thereby suppressing the occurrence of delay.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56, in the initial setting process in step S9056, control for executing an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed. As such an initial operation, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA from the retracted state as the second state that does not overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. You may change to the advance state as a 1st state. Thereby, for example, by making the display area of the main image display device 905MA on which unstable display is performed difficult or impossible to visually recognize, the occurrence of delay can be suppressed while appropriately performing the initial operation.

  Alternatively, as an initial operation based on the control in the initial setting process, an effect device such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be operated with an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns in the notice effect or the reach effect.

  FIG. 67 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the upper mechanism 9050T including the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the upper mechanism 9050T. The movable members 9051 and 9052 provided in the upper mechanism 9050T are pivotally supported by the decoration member 9057 and can be rotated, and the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 have different rotation ranges. That is, the movable member 9052 can be rotated between a retracted position and an advanced position with respect to the movable member 9051. The movable member 9051 has a configuration in which a base body is disposed behind a front surface portion provided with a plurality of light emitters, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the upper mechanism 9050T is in the retracted state as the initial state, the longitudinal direction of the movable member 9051 is positioned on the upper side in a state along the substantially horizontal direction. In the operation pattern T1 shown in FIG. 67B, the movable member 9052 can be rotated without moving the decorative member 9057 and the movable member 9051 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. In the operation pattern T2 shown in FIG. 67 (C), the movable members 9051 and 9052 are rotated in an overlapped state with the downward movement of the decoration member 9057 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG. it can. In the operation pattern T3 shown in FIG. 67D, the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060A, and the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060B. Can be rotated with respect to the movable member 9051, and the movable member 9052 can be advanced below the movable member 9051.

  FIG. 68 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the lower mechanism 9050B including the movable members 9053 and 9054 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the lower mechanism 9050B. The movable members 9053 and 9054 included in the lower mechanism 9050B are connected to the frame of the lower support unit via a predetermined link mechanism, and can move within a predetermined range by the power of the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. The link mechanism includes, for example, link members 90642a and 90642b and link members 90645a and 90645b shown in FIG. 68 (B). One end of each of the link members 90645a and 90645b is pivotally supported by the frame, and the other end is pivotally supported near the lower end of the movable member 9054 to guide the movement of the movable member 9054.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, when the lower mechanism 9050B is in the retracted state as the initial state, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054. Thus, the player can hardly visually recognize the movable member 9053. In the operation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 68B, the movable member 9053 is moved upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with a slight rotation by the driving force of the operation motor 9050C. In the operation pattern B2 shown in FIG. 68C, the movable member 9054 can be moved upward in accordance with the movement of the movable member 9053 by the further driving force of the operation motor 9050C.

  The initial operation pattern makes it possible to execute an initial operation in which the upper mechanism 9050T is continuously operated in the operation patterns T1 to T3 and an initial operation in which the lower mechanism 9050B is continuously operated in the operation patterns B1 and B2. The initial operation for operating the upper mechanism 9050T and the initial operation for operating the lower mechanism 9050B may be set such that the respective initial operations are executed in order and the execution periods do not overlap each other, or at least partially. It may be set such that each initial operation can be executed in parallel by overlapping the execution periods. Even when each initial operation is executed in order, the initial operation executed before the initial operation time elapses is an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member. 9057 is operated. In addition, when the initial operations are executed in parallel, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration are used in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns in a period in which the initial operation is executed in parallel. The member 9057 is operated.

  As described above, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 are operated in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. Thereby, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the effect device can be operated with a plurality of operation patterns corresponding to the effect accompanying the execution of the game, and the operation can be appropriately confirmed.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As a specific example, in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 56 that the relay unconnected flag is on, notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 is not performed. In other words, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed, while the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In some cases, control is performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member. At the same time, when it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011 in step S9054 shown in FIG. 56 and it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on in step S90205 shown in FIG. 59A, step S90206. It is controlled to display the checksum calculation contents and the like by the update display. That is, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, while the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9016A are displayed. When either one of the substrates 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 are not connected, control is performed so that the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the control whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed and the control whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be displayed. As long as it is configured to be able to be realized.

  Below, the modification regarding abnormality notification of a movable member is demonstrated first. In the above embodiment, if it is determined in step S9057 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the processes in steps S9058 and S9059 are not executed together with the process in step S9060. In the above description, the control is performed so that not only the abnormality notification of the movable member but also the confirmation of the origin position is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the relay unconnected flag is on, both steps S9058 and S9059 or only step S9058 may be executed. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be confirmed based on the position detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061. While determining whether or not the origin is abnormal, control may be performed so that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed when the origin abnormality occurs.

  Alternatively, even when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are in the unconnected state, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be performed, while the notification mode of the abnormality notification is the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. Compared to the notification mode of abnormality notification when the relay board 9016A is connected, the notification mode may be difficult to recognize. For example, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the image display size is reduced, the image transparency is increased, and the image display is performed. What is necessary is just to be able to set it as the alerting | reporting aspect which cannot recognize abnormality alerting of a movable member by shortening a period, reducing the frequency | count of displaying an image, or the combination of these part or all. When a notification operation is performed using a plurality of effect devices, a notification mode in which it is difficult to recognize an abnormality notification of the movable member by reducing the number of effect devices used for the notification operation may be adopted. As described above, the range of the connection state of whether or not the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected is determined, and the limit of the abnormality notification that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not executed is determined, or What is necessary is just to set a limit to the abnormality notification of the movable member according to the connection state by determining the limit of the abnormality notification to be executed in a notification mode that is difficult to recognize.

  In the embodiment described above, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed in the initial setting process in step S9056 even when the relay unconnected flag is on. On the other hand, when the relay unconnected flag is on, it may be controlled not to execute the initial operation of the movable member. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed, while the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. In such a case, it may be controlled not to perform the initial operation of the movable member.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control board 9012 are not directly connected to the effect control board 9012 and the harness HN1 (not via other boards), such as the effect control relay board 9016A. It has been described that the control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member in the connected state. On the other hand, for example, a board that is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, is not connected to the effect control board 9012. In such a case, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C that provide driving force for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the movable member position sensor 9061 that detect the operation state of the movable members 9051 to 9054, etc. It has been described as being connected to the drive control board 9016B. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which provided separately the board | substrate with which operation motor 9060A-9060C is connected, and the board | substrate with which movable member position sensor 9061 is connected. For example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be connected to the drive control board 9016B, while the movable member position sensor 9061 may be connected to a sensor board different from the drive control board 9016B. In this case, different control may be performed on a plurality of boards that can be directly or indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 depending on the connection state. As an example, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are connected directly or indirectly, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are not connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member. In addition, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are not connected, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are directly or indirectly connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, it may be controlled so as to notify the abnormality of the movable member while not executing.

  In the above embodiment, as a configuration for detecting the state of movable members such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, the position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be detected using the movable member position sensor 9061. On the other hand, any state can be used as long as it can detect an arbitrary state in the movable member and can perform abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. For example, a sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the speed, acceleration, movement amount, rotation amount, operation time, shape, temperature, or part or all of the movable members 9051 to 9054 at a predetermined position. What is necessary is just to set and enable the abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. In addition, in a drive mechanism that supplies a driving force for changing (moving) the movable member such as the operation motors 9060A to 9060C together with the state of the movable member such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 or instead of the state of the movable member. An arbitrary state can be detected and abnormality notification can be executed based on the detection result. Instead of the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the movable member may be changed (moved) by an arbitrary driving mechanism that supplies a driving force such as a solenoid. As described above, it may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in an arbitrary drive mechanism and perform abnormality notification based on the detection result.

  In the above embodiment, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in step S9058 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 56, and if it is determined in step S9059 that the origin is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S9060. It has been described as a notification that an origin abnormality has occurred. In addition to the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, or in place of the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, for example, the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is detected by the effect control process in step S9065 shown in FIG. Based on the result, abnormality notification of the movable member may be executable. With respect to the abnormality notification during the normal operation of the movable member, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, while the production control board 9012 and the production control. When the relay board 9016A for use is in an unconnected state, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member.

  In the said embodiment, it demonstrated as what can perform abnormality alert | report about the movable member for effects like the movable members 9051-9054. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an abnormality notification may be executed for any movable member that can operate according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the wiring for driving the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door shown in FIG. 37 may be connected to the main board 9011 via the solenoid relay board. Also, detection by a sensor for detecting the operating state of the movable wing piece provided in the normal variable winning ball device 906B and a sensor for detecting the operating state of the big winning door provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. A wiring for transmitting a signal may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board or a sensor relay board. In such a configuration, when the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board or the sensor relay board are connected, it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable blade piece or the big prize door, while the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board. Alternatively, when the sensor relay board is not connected, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable blade piece or the big prize door. Alternatively, when the payout control board and the launch control board are connected, an abnormality notification of the launch motor can be performed, while when the payout control board and the launch control board are not connected, the launch motor is abnormal. You may control not to alert | report.

  Furthermore, the movable member is not limited to one that can perform abnormality notification, and may be one that can perform abnormality notification for any circuit, device, or other element. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output may be possible.

  In the embodiment described above, the presence / absence of abnormality notification is changed according to the connection state between a plurality of substrates such as the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of abnormality notification may be changed according to the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, apparatus, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. That is, in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided, when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected, any abnormality notification can be performed. If the first connection unit and the second connection unit are in an unconnected state, any control may be performed so that abnormality notification is not performed. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output is possible when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided. On the other hand, when the first connection unit and the second connection unit are not connected, control may be performed so that no output is performed. Further, the unconnected state between the substrates and the unconnected state between the connection portions may include a state in which at least a part of wiring is connected and another part of the wiring is not connected. .

  Next, a modified example in the case of displaying the checksum calculation result and the like will be described. In the above embodiment, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 56 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, a memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. 59 (A). When it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is off, the process of step S90206 is not executed, so that the control result such as the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011 in step S9054 shown in FIG. 56, if the relay unconnected flag is off, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is executed. It may not be done. In other words, even when the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, they are stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. It may be controlled so that the checksum calculation itself using the effect data is not executed, and the calculation result is not displayed accordingly. Also, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on. If it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on, the memory inspection processing in step S9055 may be executed. In this case, it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 59A whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined that there is no connection, the checksum calculation result and the like are determined in step S90206. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a connection, it may be controlled not to display the checksum calculation result or the like by not executing the process of step S90206. As described above, when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result is not executed by not executing the process of calculating the checksum itself. May be controlled so as not to be displayed, or the processing for calculating the checksum may be executed but the checksum calculation result may not be displayed.

  Alternatively, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed even when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. The display form may be less recognizable than the display form in the case where both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. For example, when displaying the checksum calculation result by displaying the image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, reducing the display size of the image, increasing the transparency of the image, It suffices if the display period can be displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult to recognize the checksum calculation result by reducing the display period, reducing the number of times the image is displayed, or by combining some or all of them. As described above, both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, or one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are provided. By defining the connection status range of whether it is in an unconnected state, by defining the limit of display that does not display the checksum calculation result, or by defining the display limit of displaying in a display mode that is difficult to recognize, What is necessary is just to provide a display restriction according to the connection state.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, while the effect control relay board 9016A is directly connected via the harness HN1 (via another board). It was described as being connected to the effect control board 9012. In contrast, for example, a plurality of boards indirectly connected to the presentation control board 9012 via another board such as the presentation control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, and the presentation control board 9012. Checksum calculation results and the like can be displayed when they are not connected, and checksum calculation results and the like are not displayed when some of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. You may control to. Alternatively, for a plurality of boards that can be directly connected to the effect control board 9012, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, and one of them can be displayed. When the display unit and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, it may be controlled not to display a checksum calculation result or the like.

  In the above embodiment, as a determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, step S90204 in the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. In the above description, the checksum is calculated and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the data determination method is not limited to the checksum calculation, and any determination method may be employed. The checksum calculation is not limited to calculating an exclusive OR for each address data, but may be an exclusive OR calculation using data at a plurality of addresses as an operation unit.

  In the embodiment described above, the check sum of the stored data is calculated for all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the checksum of the stored data may be calculated for a part of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result may be displayed. Whether or not a checksum is to be calculated may be varied depending on the contents stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, for the effect control program and various management data stored in the first storage area of the ROM 90121, and the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, the calculation results and the like are used as checksum calculation objects. On the other hand, the audio data stored in the second storage area of the ROM 90121, the audio data other than the image data stored in the effect data memory 90123A, the motor data and the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C are displayed. The checksum may not be calculated, and the calculation result may not be displayed. Depending on the condition of establishment of predetermined calculation conditions, the setting of which stored data is used to calculate the checksum may be varied. For example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed, the checksum is calculated using the data stored in the ROM 90121 and the calculation result can be displayed, while the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are displayed. The checksum calculation using the stored data may not be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the storage data is normal for storage devices such as the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C that are mounted on the effect control board 9012 and can store effect data used for effect execution. In the above description, it is possible to display the determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage device capable of storing control data used for arbitrary control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can display a determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. May be. For example, whether or not the stored data is normal for the ROM 90101 that is mounted on the main board 9011 and can store control data (including binary codes constituting a program module) used for controlling the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 Such a determination result may be displayed. In this case, for example, a plurality of substrates that can be connected to the main substrate 9011, such as a payout control substrate and an information terminal substrate, may be set in advance as the second substrate and the third substrate. Then, when both the second substrate and the second substrate are not connected to the main substrate 9011, the determination result of the stored data such as the checksum calculation result using the stored data of the ROM 90101 is displayed as the main image display device 905MA. Display is possible with a display device such as, and when either one of the second substrate and the third substrate is not connected to the main substrate 9011, control is performed so that the determination result of the stored data is not displayed. Also good. Further, the present invention is not limited to determining whether the storage data of the non-volatile recording medium such as the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, and for example, a volatile recording medium such as the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131. It may be determined whether the stored data is normal and the determination result can be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the checksum calculation result that is the determination result of the stored data according to the connection state between the plurality of boards such as the connection board between the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the production control board 9012. It was explained as something that changes whether or not to display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the determination result of the stored data is displayed depends on the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. It may be a thing. That is, in the configuration in which the second connection portion and the third connection portion connectable to the first connection portion are provided, both the second connection portion and the third connection portion and the first connection portion are in an unconnected state. The determination result by the determination process using the stored data can be displayed, and the stored data is used when either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state. You may control not to display the determination result by determination processing. The second connection unit and the third connection unit are not limited to the display of the determination result by the determination process using the stored data, and in the configuration in which the second connection unit and the third connection unit connectable to the first connection unit are provided. When both of the first connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state, any processing result using arbitrary data can be output, and either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit May be controlled so as not to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data.

  In addition, various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the configuration for confirming the connection state uses a voltage at a connection confirmation terminal such as the terminals TM22 and TN22 shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, or determines whether or not a command is received. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a configuration in which a connection state can be confirmed mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically using a switch or a sensor may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the process of step S90102 shown in FIG. 54, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is to be a special gaming state such as the probability changing state, and based on the determination to be the probability changing state. In the above description, it is assumed that the probability variation control condition is satisfied and the control is performed in the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that a game ball that has won (entered) a prize winning opening (second prize winning opening) in a probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. The probability change control condition may be satisfied, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability changing state. The winning prize opening (second winning prize opening) of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. It may be constituted so that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, the variable winning device provided in the game area is released from the closed state (second state) based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening provided in the game area. When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. In such a pachinko gaming machine 901, whether or not abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 56 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 59 (A). It may be configured so that at least one of the control of whether or not and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be realized.

  The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that can perform a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols as a plurality of types of identification information, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified One game is completed by displaying and displaying a display result (for example, a plurality of reels, etc.), and a prize (for example, a cherry prize, a watermelon prize, a bell prize, a replay prize, a BB prize, an RB prize, etc.) is selected according to the display result. ) Can be generated. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment has the feature that hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided. That is, in the slot machine, whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 56 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. Of the control and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed, at least one of them may be realized.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including the lighting operation can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine, for example. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 56 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is OFF, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 can be executed. In this way, when the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second board such as the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being frequently executed in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, and to improve the work efficiency.

  Connectors CN01 and CN11 shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) include terminals TM22 and TN22, which are connection confirmation terminals, respectively. In step S9052 shown in FIG. 58 and the like, based on the voltage at these connection confirmation terminals. Check the connection status. Thereby, a connection state can be confirmed with a simple configuration.

  In the above embodiment, for example, when it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011 in step S9054 shown in FIG. 56 and it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on in step S90205 shown in FIG. In addition, the check sum calculation contents and the like are displayed by the update display in step S90206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 that the main board 9011 is connected, or if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 59A that the relay unconnected flag is off, step S90206 is performed. The update display is not performed, and the control content of the checksum is not displayed. Thus, in the configuration including the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second and third boards such as the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011, either the second board or the third board is provided. When one side and the first substrate are not connected, the output for inspection can be appropriately suppressed by controlling not to display the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result. As a result, for example, one of the second board and the third board and the first board are accidentally disconnected (temporarily disconnected from the cable) while being installed in an amusement store, and the power is turned on. In the situation, the display of the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the erroneous recognition of the failure at the game shop side.

  Further, for example, the ROM 90121 as shown in FIG. 39A stores audio data used for audio control, and the effect data memory 90123A as shown in FIG. 39B1 contains image data used for display control. When stored, the audio data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range of the effect data memory 90123A continuous from the last address of the ROM 90121. Thus, by storing the first control data such as voice data in the area corresponding to the specific address range of the second area that is continuous from the final address of the first area, the storage area can be effectively used to reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition to the reduction, the control data can be read smoothly and appropriate control can be performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

5 effect display device 321 movable member 120 CPU for effect control
100 Microcomputer for game control 102 RAM
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 901 Pachinko machine 905MA Main image display device 905SU Sub image display device 908L, 908R Speaker 909a Sky LED
909b Left frame LED
909c Right frame LED
9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9016A Production control relay board 9016B Drive control board 9016C to 9016F Light emitter control board 9051 to 9054 Movable member 9060A to 9060C Operation motor 9061 Movable member position sensor 9071 to 9074 Light emitter unit 90120 For effect control Microcomputer 90121 ROM
90123A-90123C Production data memory 90130 CPU
90140 VDP
90411, 90413a to 90413c Light emitter driver 90411 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminals

Claims (2)

A movable body capable of a first operation and a second operation;
Production execution means capable of performing production,
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means;
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means,
The output means is set to the second output state;
The effect execution means, after executing the first effect of the first mode with the first movement of the movable body and the first pattern of executing the special effect of the first mode with the first operation of the movable body, The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect with a second pattern that executes a special effect of a second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. . A movable body capable of a first operation and a second operation;
Production execution means capable of performing production,
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means;
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided on the other board connected via the wiring member to the board on which the output means is provided,
The output means is set to the first output state;
The effect execution means, after executing the first effect of the first mode with the first movement of the movable body and the first pattern of executing the special effect of the first mode with the first operation of the movable body, The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect with a second pattern that executes a special effect of a second mode different from the first mode in accordance with the first operation after the second operation of the movable body. .